Lexus Owners Manual Pdf OM48D65U
User Manual: Lexus Owners Manual Pdf 2015 Lexus RX 350 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 886 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mir-
rors, and steering column.
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-your-
self maintenance, and maintenance information.
5When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information.
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt, SRS
airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners.
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................................... 30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors
Smart access system with
push-button start.......................... 35
Wireless remote control.............. 49
Side doors .......................................... 52
Back door........................................... 56
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats.......................................... 68
Rear seats........................................... 72
Driving position memory
................ 76
Head restraints.................................. 81
Seat belts ........................................... 83
Steering wheel................................. 90
Anti-glare inside rear
view mirror...................................... 92
Outside rear view mirrors........... 95
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................................ 98
Moon roof ......................................... 101
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap......... 105
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system........ 110
Alarm.................................................... 112
Theft prevention labels ................. 116
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ............... 117
SRS airbags ....................................... 119
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 132
Child restraint systems ............... 137
Installing child restraints............... 141
1Before driving
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
• Navigation system
• Air conditioning controls
• Windshield wiper de-icer
• Rear view monitor system
• Intuitive parking assist
• Audio/video system
• Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogging
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 154
Engine (ignition) switch .............. 165
Automatic transmission
(6-speed models) ........................ 171
Automatic transmission
(8-speed models) ...................... 178
Turn signal lever ............................ 187
Parking brake ................................. 189
Horn.................................................... 190
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ....................... 191
Indicators and warning
lights................................................. 194
Multi-information display......... 200
Head-up display ........................... 206
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch.............................. 211
Fog light switch .............................. 215
Windshield wipers and
washer.............................................. 217
Rear window wiper and
washer............................................ 224
Headlight cleaner switch.......... 226
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ............................... 227
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................ 232
Intuitive parking assist ................ 245
Rear view monitor system
(rear view mirror-attached
type)................................................ 255
Rear view monitor system
(vehicles with the Lexus
Display Audio system)............ 264
Driving assist systems................. 269
All-wheel drive lock switch...... 275
Hill-start assist control ............... 276
Pre-Collision System.................. 278
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ....... 286
2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle precautions........ 292
Cargo and luggage..................... 296
Vehicle load limits......................... 301
Winter driving tips ....................... 302
Trailer towing................................ 306
Dinghy towing ............................... 323
2When driving
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Lexus Display Audio
system ........................................... 328
Display settings ............................. 332
Setup menu..................................... 334
Vehicle information.................... 340
Mobile Assistant........................... 343
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system (with the Lexus
Display Audio system) ............ 345
Automatic air conditioning
system (without a navigation
system or the Lexus Display
Audio system)............................ 353
Rear window defogger
switch............................................... 361
Windshield wiper de-icer......... 363
3-3. Using the Lexus Display
Audio system
Audio system (with the Lexus
Display Audio system) ........... 365
Using the radio............................. 368
Using the CD player.................. 383
Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA discs.................... 384
Listening to an iPod..................... 394
Listening to a USB memory..... 402
Using the AUX port .................... 412
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio................................................ 414
Optimal use of the audio
system ............................................ 428
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ........................... 430
Hands-free system
(for mobile phone).................... 433
Using the Bluetooth®
phone .............................................. 441
Setting the hands-free
system ............................................ 459
Bluetooth® settings .................... 472
3-4. Using the audio system
Audio system (without a
navigation system or the
Lexus Display Audio
system).......................................... 480
Using the radio............................. 483
Using the CD player................... 492
Playing MP3 and WMA
discs ................................................. 501
Operating an iPod........................ 510
Operating a USB memory...... 520
Bluetooth® audio system ........ 530
Using the Bluetooth® audio
system ........................................... 535
3Interior features
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player........ 540
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player......... 544
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ................................................ 551
Optimal use of the audio
system ............................................ 552
Using the AUX port ................... 554
Using the steering wheel
audio switches............................ 556
Hands-free system for
mobile phones........................... 560
Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phones).................. 565
Making a phone call.................... 573
Setting a mobile phone.............. 578
Security and system setup....... 584
Using the phone book............... 588
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 595
• Interior lights ............................... 596
• Personal lights ............................ 596
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features ............. 598
• Glove box .................................... 599
• Bottle holders/
door pockets.............................. 600
• Cup holders.................................. 601
• Console box................................ 604
• Coin holder ................................. 606
• Auxiliary boxes .......................... 606
• Under tray................................... 608
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors........................................ 609
Vanity mirrors................................. 610
Clock.................................................... 611
Outside temperature
display............................................. 613
Multi-display light control.......... 615
Power outlets.................................. 616
Heated steering wheel ............... 619
Seat heaters and ventilators .... 620
Armrest............................................ 622
Coat hooks ..................................... 623
Assist grips...................................... 624
Floor mat.......................................... 625
Luggage compartment
features.......................................... 627
Garage door opener.................. 632
Compass ........................................ 638
Safety Connect............................. 642
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
6
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 650
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior................... 653
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements ..... 656
General maintenance............... 659
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs
....................................... 663
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions.................................. 664
Hood.................................................. 667
Positioning a floor jack.............. 668
Engine compartment.................. 670
Tires .................................................. 684
Tire inflation pressure................. 693
Wheels.............................................. 697
Air conditioning filter.................. 699
Electronic key battery................. 701
Checking and replacing
fuses................................................ 703
Headlight aim.................................. 716
Light bulbs........................................ 719
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers..................... 734
If your vehicle needs to be
towed.............................................. 735
If you think something is
wrong............................................. 742
Fuel pump shut off system ........ 743
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ........................................ 744
If a warning message is
displayed....................................... 754
If you have a flat tire..................... 774
If the engine will not start .......... 789
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P............................... 791
If you lose your keys.................... 792
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ............... 793
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ................................... 796
If your vehicle overheats ........... 799
If the vehicle becomes
stuck............................................... 802
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.................................. 804
4Maintenance and care 5When trouble arises
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).................... 806
Fuel information............................. 818
Tire information.............................. 821
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ............. 834
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................... 847
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.......................... 850
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..................................... 851
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)................................... 853
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)................................... 863
Abbreviation list .................................. 868
Alphabetical index.............................. 870
What to do if... ...................................... 882
6Vehicle specifications 7For owners
Index
9
: If equipped
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Tail lights
P. 211
Rear window wiper
P. 224
Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
P. 684
P. 774
P. 815
P. 821
Rear side marker lights
P. 211
Rear turn signal lights
P. 187
Back door opener button
P. 56
Back door
P. 56
Fuel filler door
P. 105
Side doors
P. 52
Rear window defogger*
P. 361
10
Pictorial index Interior
SRS driver airbag
P. 119
SRS knee airbags
P. 119
Front seats
P. 68
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 119
Power outlet
AUX port
USB port*1
P. 616
P. 412, 554
P. 394, 402, 510, 520
Door pockets
Bottle holders
P. 600
P. 600
Rear SRS side airbags
P. 119
Power outlet
P. 616
Console box
P. 604
Armrest
Auxiliary box
P. 622
P. 606
Power outlet
P. 616
Power window switches
P. 98
Rear seats
P. 72
Head restraints
P. 81
Seat belts
P. 83
Front SRS side airbags
P. 119
Cup holders
P. 601
Rear seat entertainment system , *2
11
A
Personal lights
Interior lights
P. 596
P. 596
Sun visors
P. 609
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 119
Interior lights
Personal lights
P. 596
P. 596
Vanity mirrors
P. 610
“SOS” button
Auxiliary box
P. 642
P. 606
: If equipped
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*2: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Moon roof switches
P. 101
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Garage door opener switches
Compass
P. 92
P. 632
P. 638
Rear view monitor system
P. 255
Coat hooks
P. 623
Assist grips
P. 624
13
C
Lexus Display Audio controller
P. 328
Automatic transmission shift lever
P. 171, 178
Shift lock override button
P. 791
Floor mat
P. 625
All-wheel drive lock switch
P. 275
Seat heater and ventilator switches
P. 620
VSC off switch
P. 269
Remote Touch , *
: If equipped
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Cup holders
P. 601
14
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 211
P. 187
P. 215
Windshield wipers and washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch
P. 217
P. 224
Power back door main
switch
P. 58
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
P. 90
Engine (ignition) switch
P. 165
Hood lock release
lever
P. 667
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 191
P. 200
Glove box
P. 599
Horn
P. 190
Parking brake pedal
P. 189
15
A Without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
Security indicator
P. 110, 112
Audio system
P. 480
Emergency
flasher switch
P. 734
●Display light control
●Outside temperature
display
●Clock
●Air conditioning
display
●Audio display
P. 615
P. 613
P. 611
P. 353
P. 480
Multi display
Air conditioning
system
P. 353
Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
P. 361
16
A With the Lexus Display Audio system
Air conditioning
system
P. 345
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defogger
switch
P. 361
Audio system
P. 365
Emergency
flasher switch
P. 734
Security indicator
P. 110, 112
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Clock
P. 611
Lexus Display Audio
system
Rear view monitor
system
P. 328
P. 264
18
B
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Telephone switch*
P. 433, 560
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button
P. 232
Talk switch*
P. 433, 560
Steering wheel audio switches*
P. 430, 556
Type A
Multi-information switches
P. 200
Cruise control switch
P. 227, 232
Telephone switch*
P. 433, 560
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button
P. 232
Talk switch*
P. 433, 560
Steering wheel audio switches*
P. 430, 556
Type B
Multi-information switches
P. 200
Cruise control switch
P. 227, 232
Paddle shift switches
P. 171, 178
19
D
Pre-collision braking
off switch
P. 279
Tire pressure warning
reset switch
P. 686
C
Heated steering wheel
switch
P. 619
Head-up display main switch
P. 206
Display position adjustment
switch
P. 206
Display contrast adjustment
switch
P. 206
: If equipped
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
20
: If equipped
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
E
Cup holder
P. 601
Headlight cleaner switch
P. 226
Power back door switch
P. 57
Fuel filler door opener
P. 105
Instrument panel light
control buttons
P. 192
“ODO/TRIP” button
P. 192
Windshield wiper de-icer switch , *
P. 363
BSM main switch
P. 286
Pictorial index Instrument panel
23
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. How-
ever, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under war-
ranty.
24
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect elec-
tronic systems such as:
●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
●Cruise control system
●Dynamic radar cruise control system
●Anti-lock brake system
●SRS airbag system
●Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record cer-
tain data, such as:
•Engine speed
• Accelerator status
•Brake status
• Vehicle speed
•Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with
which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations,
sounds or pictures.
25
●Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
●Usage of data collected through Safety Connect /Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland
only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to
those services, please refer to the Safety Connect /Lexus Enform Telematics Sub-
scription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
26
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
●Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing infor-
mation about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
27
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the
moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
28
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause injury to people. You
are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury
to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehi-
cle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to
avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
Before driving 1
29
1-1. Key information
Keys.............................................. 30
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Smart access system with
push-button start .................... 35
Wireless remote control......... 49
Side doors.................................... 52
Back door .................................... 56
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats................................... 68
Rear seats.................................... 72
Driving position memory........ 76
Head restraints........................... 81
Seat belts .................................... 83
Steering wheel.......................... 90
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 92
Outside rear view mirrors...... 95
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows.......................... 98
Moon roof.................................. 101
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap............................................ 105
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system....................................... 110
Alarm........................................... 112
Theft prevention labels ........... 116
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ......... 117
SRS airbags ............................... 119
Front passenger occupant
classification system............ 132
Child restraint systems ......... 137
Installing child restraints........ 141
30
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 35)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 49)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Card key (electronic key)
(if equipped)
Operating the smart access sys-
tem with push-button start
(P. 35)
31
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key:
Electronic keys: Slide the release
lever and take the key out.
Card key: Press the lock release
button and take the key out.
If the key cannot be inserted in a
lock cylinder, turn it over and re-
attempt to insert it. The mechanical
key with grooves on one side can
be inserted in one direction only.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P. 793 )
■Card key (if equipped)
●The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.
●If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, press down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
●To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it while pressing the lock
release button.
32
1-1. Key information
●The card key is not waterproof.
■When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 599 )
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 792)
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
●If the battery cover is not installed and
the battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, rein-
stall the battery with the positive termi-
nal facing the Lexus emblem.
33
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
●Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems, induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-
frequency therapy equipment.
■Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that
are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function
properly.
■In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-
related problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including
the card key, to your Lexus dealer.
■When a vehicle key is lost
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your
Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that
was provided with your vehicle.
34
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
■Precautions for handling the card key
●Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key.
Doing so may damage the card key.
●If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card
key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have
your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
●Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
●If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
●When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rap-
idly.
●The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the
following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical
pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.
35
1
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the elec-
tronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your
pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the side doors (P. 36)
Locks and unlocks the back door (P. 37)
Starts the engine (P. 165)
Electronic key
Electronic key
Electronic key
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Unlocking and locking the side doors (front door handles only)
Grip the driver's door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passen-
ger's door handle to unlock all the
doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 83 4)
Touch the lock sensor (the inden-
tation on the upper part of the
door handle) to lock the doors.
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Locking the back door
Press the button to lock the door.
Opening the back door
Press the button to open the door.
The door automatically opens fully.
The door cannot be opened for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna inside the luggage
compartment
Antenna outside the luggage
compartment
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
an outside door handle. (Only
the doors detecting the key
can be operated.)
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
■Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door
handle
Touch both lock sensors on the upper and
lower part of the door handle simultaneously.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown
on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents
resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any
warning message on the multi-information display. (P. 75 4 )
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 5
seconds.
An attempt was made to lock
the vehicle while a door was
open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm pings
repeatedly
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned to
ACCESSORY mode while
the driver's door is open (The
driver's door was opened
when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCES-
SORY mode.)
Close the driver's door.
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned off
while the driver's door is
open.
Close the driver's door.
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Battery-saving function
If the vehicle is parked for a long period of time, the battery-saving function is acti-
vated in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged and the elec-
tronic key battery from being depleted.
●In the following circumstances, unlocking the vehicle using the entry function
may take longer than usual:
• When the entry function has not been used for 5 days or more
• When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
●If the entry function has not been used for 14 days or more, the vehicle cannot
be unlocked by a door other than the driver's door. To unlock the vehicle, grip
the driver's door handle or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical
key.
The system will resume operation when:
●The vehicle is locked using the lock sensor.
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.
(P. 49)
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 793 )
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the fol-
lowing situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wire-
less remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: P. 793)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication devices
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
●When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit
radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Note for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor or in the
glove box.
●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception con-
ditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside
the vehicle.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the elec-
tronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.
●The doors may lock or unlock if the electronic key is within the effective range
and a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or
in a car wash. The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60
seconds if a door is not opened and closed.
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Notes for locking the doors
●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock
operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
●When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals
will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will
be given.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a position 6 ft.
(2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take
care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during
a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a
buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow,
mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock
sensor on the lower part of the door handle.
●Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle.
Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.
■Notes for the unlocking function
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer
to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m)
of the vehicle.
●The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.
(P. 83 4)
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
■If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 793 )
●Starting the engine:P. 794
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops. (P. 766)
●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate
that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when nec-
essary. (P. 70 1)
• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote con-
trol does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Induction cookers
• Table lamps
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 70 1
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Customization
Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 83 4)
■Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
This system meets the certification requirements of Radio Law.
For vehicles sold in Hawaii, Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico
FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-6
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
FCC ID: HYQ14AEB
FCC ID: HYQ13CZF
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
For vehicles sold in the mainland U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-6
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
FCC ID: HYQ14AEB
FCC ID: HYQ13CZF
FCC ID: HYQ14ADF
FCC ID: HYQ14AEF
FCC ID: HYQ13CZG
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause inter-
ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-
pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the
smart access system antennas. (P. 39 )
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.
●User of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemak-
ers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter
defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about
its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for disabling the entry function.
49
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
It also opens and closes the back door.
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the but-
ton again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
Opens and closes the back
door (press and hold)
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (P. 50)
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Operation signals
Doors:
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Back door:
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back
door is opening/closing.
Windows and moon roof:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are opening.
■Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
■Security feature
P. 41
■Panic mode
■Back door operation
The back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when
you leave the vehicle. The back door will not be locked automatically after it has
been opened and then closed.
■Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(P. 112)
When is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound inter-
mittently and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
51
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Reversing the operation of the power back door
Pressing the wireless remote control switch again while the power back door is
operating will cause the operation to reverse.
■Wireless remote control operation while the power back door is closing
If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors while the power back door is
closing, the doors will lock after the power back door has completely closed. To
prevent locking the keys inside the vehicle, do not place the electric key inside the
vehicle while the power back door is closing.
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 42
■If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 793 )
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 45
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 70 1
■Customization
Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 8 3 4)
52
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switches.
■Entry function
P. 36
■Wireless remote control
P. 49
■Door lock switches
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
■Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle even
if the lock buttons are in the lock
position.
53
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
STEP 1
STEP 2
54
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 793 )
■If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to protect the inside mechanism.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 83 4)
55
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting
in death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock all the doors.
●Ensure that all the doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful with the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in the locked position.
●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
■When opening or closing a door
Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline,
whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is
blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare
for any unpredictable movement.
56
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened/closed by the follow-
ing procedures:
■Locking and unlocking the back door
Door lock switches
P. 52
Entry function
P. 37
Wireless remote control
P. 49
■Opening the back door from outside the vehicle automatically
Using the back door opener button
Press the back door opener
button.
Using the wireless remote control
P. 49
57
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Power back door switch
Press the switch to close the back
door.
Pressing the switch again while the
power back door is closing will
cause it to open again.
However, the reverse operation
cannot be performed for the first
second after automatic operation
starts even if the switch is pressed
again.
■Opening the back door from outside the vehicle manually*
Raise the back door while push-
ing up the back door opener
button.
*: This setting must be customized
at your Lexus dealer.
■Opening the back door from inside the vehicle
Press and hold the switch to
open/close the back door.
Pressing the switch again while
the power back door is operat-
ing will cause the operation to
reverse.
58
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
When closing the back door
Lower the back door using the
back door handle, and make sure
to push the back door down from
the outside to close it.
Canceling the power back door system
Turn off the main switch in the glove box to disable the power back door
system.
On
Off
The back door cannot be operated
even with the wireless remote con-
trol or power back door switch.
59
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■The power back door can be operated when
●The back door is unlocked. (Except for using the back door opener button or
wireless remote control, when the power back door can be operated even if it is
locked.)
●The power back door main switch is on.
●To open the power back door when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode, the power back door main switch must be on, the vehi-
cle speed must be lower than 1 mph (3 km/h) and the shift lever must be in P.
(When using the back door opener button only)
●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off. (When using the wireless
remote control only)
■Luggage compartment lights
■Back door closer
In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will auto-
matically close it to the fully closed position.
●The back door closer will operate regardless of the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode.
●The back door can be opened while the back door closer is operating by press-
ing the back door opener button.
The luggage compartment lights turn on
when the back door is opened with the lug-
gage compartment light switch on.
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned off, the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
60
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Power back door operation
●A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the
back door is opening/closing.
●The back door can still be opened and closed manually, even when the power
back door main switch is off.
●Pressing the back door opener button while the power back door system is
operating will cause the back door to switch to manual operation.
●If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, a buzzer
will sound and the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direc-
tion.
●If two or more successive attempts are made to close the back door, a buzzer
will sound and the back door will switch to manual operation.
■Jam protection function
■After the back door has been opened and then closed
Lock the back door as the back door will not lock automatically.
Sensors are attached to the left and right
sides of the power back door. If these sensors
detect an obstruction while the power back
door is closing, the jam protection function
will return the door to the fully open position.
61
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■If the back door opener is inoperative
The back door can be opened from the inside.
■When reconnecting the battery or changing a fuse while the back door is open:
To enable the power back door to operate properly, initialize the system by com-
pletely closing the back door manually. If the battery is reconnected or a fuse is
changed while the back door is closed, initializing the system is not necessary.
Remove the cover.
Move the lever.
STEP 1
STEP 2
62
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
●Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage
may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back
door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an acci-
dent.
●Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking
or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat
exhaustion or other injuries.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door, which may result in
death or serious injury of the child.
■Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before open-
ing it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to suddenly shut again after it is
opened.
●When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-
rounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back
door is about to open or close.
63
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
CAUTION
●Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
●Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not
hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break,
causing an accident.
●If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may sud-
denly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to
be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using
a genuine Lexus part is recommended.
●The back door may suddenly shut if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to open or
close the back door on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the back door
unexpectedly opening or closing by itself.
Make sure that the back door is fully open
and secure before using the luggage com-
partment.
●When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from being
caught.
●When closing the back door, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
back door handle is used to fully close the
back door, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.
64
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■Back door closer
●Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power
back door system is cancelled.
■Power back door
Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or
anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back
door is about to open or close.
●If the power back door system is turned off with the main switch while the back
door is operating automatically, the automatic operation is stopped. The back
door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the
back door may open or close unexpectedly.
●If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer
may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then
has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door
may open or close abruptly.
●On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens. Make sure the
back door is fully open and secure.
●In the event that the back door is left slightly
open, the back door closer will automati-
cally close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the back
door closer begins to operate. Be careful
not to catch fingers or anything else in the
back door, as this may cause bone frac-
tures or other serious injuries.
65
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
CAUTION
●In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and
automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be oper-
ated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or
close abruptly.
• When the back door contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode or the engine is
started during automatic operation
●If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the power
back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may
suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck
to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door,
using a genuine Lexus part is recommended.
■Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Be careful while the jam protection function is operating. Being hit by the back
door may result in an injury.
●Although the back door stops closing when the jam protection function detects
an object, take extra care as you may still be injured if part of your body is already
caught.
●If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing, the jam protection
function will cause the back door to automatically operate in the opposite direc-
tion. However, be careful not to jam body parts in the doorframe, as an injury may
result.
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
66
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
●The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object
that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
●The sensors located on the right and left sides of the power back door detect
obstructions and prevent them from becoming jammed in the door. Some objects
may not be detected depending on their shape or how they are jammed. Be care-
ful not to get fingers or other body parts caught in the back door while it is oper-
ating as this may result in a serious injury.
NOTICE
■Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in mal-
function.
■To prevent back door closer malfunction
●Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is oper-
ating.
●If the back door is opened and closed repeatedly in a short amount of time, the
back door closer may stop operating. In this case, manually open the back door
once and wait for a while before attempting to close it again.
●Do not attach any foreign objects, such as
stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the
damper stay rod.
●Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
●Do not attach any accessories other than
genuine Lexus parts to the back door.
●Do not place your hand on the damper stay
or apply lateral forces to it.
67
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the power back door
●Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would pre-
vent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when exces-
sive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.
●Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is oper-
ating.
●Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the
power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected,
the power back door will not operate in automatic operation.
●When manually closing the back door immediately after the power back door
has been automatically opened fully, some resistance may be felt.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support adjustment switch
Seat cushion length adjustment switch (if equipped)
69
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Flattening the front seatbacks
■Before flattening the front seatbacks
Slide the rear seats as far back as possible. (P. 72 )
■Flattening the front seatbacks
Move the front seat forward, raise
the seat, and remove the head
restraint. (P. 81 )
After returning the seat to its origi-
nal position, make sure to replace
the head restraint.
Move the seatback angle adjust-
ment switch backward to flatten
the seatback.
STEP 1
STEP 2
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Active head restraints
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback dur-
ing a rear-end collision, the head
restraint moves slightly forward
and upward to help reduce the risk
of whiplash to the seat occupant.
■Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move.
Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head restraint inner
structure. These do not indicate problems.
Inner
structure
During
rear-end
collision
71
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■While driving
Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat.
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
Folding down the rear seatbacks
■Before folding down the rear seatbacks
Stow all the head restraints and the
rear center seat belt buckle.
Seat position adjustment lever
Seatback angle adjustment lever
73
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Folding down the rear seatbacks
From inside
Pull the seatback angle adjustment
lever.
To return the rear seatbacks to
their original positions, lift them up
until they lock.
From outside
Pull the levers.
Left side lever: Folds down the
left side rear seat
Right side lever: Folds down the
right side and
center rear seats
To return the rear seatbacks to
their original positions, lift them up
until they lock.
74
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Folding down the rear center seatback
Pull the center seatback angle
lever behind the seatback and fold
the seatback down.
To return the rear center seatback
to its original position, lift it up until
it locks.
CAUTION
■When folding the rear seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
●Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
●Do not fold seatbacks down while passengers are seated or luggage is placed on
the seats.
●Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to
P.
●After folding the seatback, lightly move the seat back and forth to lock it in place.
●Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment
while driving.
●Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
■Seat adjustment
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
75
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■After returning the rear seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
●Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rearward on
the top.
●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
NOTICE
■Stowing the center seat belt buckle
Before folding down the rear seatbacks, stow the center seat belt buckle to prevent
it from becoming caught in the seatbacks.
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with
the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate auto-
matically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
■Entering a position to memory
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
Press the “SET” button, then
within 3 seconds press button
“1”, “2” or “3” until the signal
beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previ-
ously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3” until
the signal beeps to recall the
desired position.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
: If equipped
77
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following:
Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to link the
driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position
cannot be linked properly.
Shift the shift lever to P and close the driver's door. Turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Press the desired button (“1”, “2” or
“3”) to recall the position. Then,
while keep pressing the button,
press the driver's door lock
switches (either lock or unlock)
until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver's
door is opened.
STEP 1
STEP 2
78
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power easy access system
When the driver enters and exits the vehicle, the driver's seat and steer-
ing wheel will automatically perform the following operations:
Exiting the vehicle: When all of the
following actions have been per-
formed, the steering wheel will
move up and back to the point far-
thest away from the driver and the
seat will move backward (auto
away function):
• The shift lever has been shifted to P
• The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off
• The driver’s seat belt has been
unfastened
Entering the vehicle: When either
of the following actions has been
performed, the steering wheel will
move toward the driver and seat
will move forward (auto return
function):
• The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned to ACCES-
SORY mode
• The driver’s seat belt has been fas-
tened
79
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■When driving position memory is linked with door unlock operation
If the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat will move toward the memorized
position but stop slightly beforehand to allow easy access to the vehicle.
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode or fastening
the driver’s seat belt moves the seat fully into the memorized position.
■Canceling the linked door unlock operation
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode and
close the driver's door.
While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switches
(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.
■Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off
Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel position) can be activated up
to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
■Stopping seat position operation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
●Press the “SET” button.
●Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
●Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
●Adjust the steering wheel using the tilt and telescopic steering control switch
(only cancels steering wheel position recall).
■Correct seat position
When the seat is in the most forward or most backward position, and the seat is
being moved in those directions, the system may not correctly recognize the cur-
rent position and the memorized position will not be correctly recalled.
■The auto away function for exiting the driver seat
If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may not
operate when the driver exits the vehicle.
■Customization
The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function
can be changed. (Customizable features P. 83 4)
STEP 1
STEP 2
80
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger
or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
81
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Head restraints
■Removing the head restraints
■Installing the head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pressing the lock release
button.
Lock release button
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
Lock release button
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.
82
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)
■Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraints to the uppermost lock position during use.
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
83
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle until
a click sound is heard.
To release the seat belt, press
the release button.
Release button
84
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal colli-
sion or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
■Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
85
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with a pre-collision system)
If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the front seat belts
will retract before the collision. (P. 278)
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. To allow the belt to extend, retract the belt and then
pull it slowly.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 141)
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 137)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 83 regarding seat belt usage.
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
86
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Seat belt extender
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
●Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a person-
alized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
87
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 83)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoul-
der and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the round part of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only
the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a result of
sudden braking or a collision.
88
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoul-
der. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(P. 8 4)
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate han-
dling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in
death or serious injury.
89
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
90
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
Auto tilt away
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned off, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following direc-
tions:
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
91
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode*.
*: Vehicles with driving position memory: If the driver's seat belt is fastened, the
steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of “ENGINE START STOP” switch
mode.
■Automatic adjustment of the steering position (vehicles with driving position
memory)
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 76)
■Notes for the auto tilt away function (vehicles with driving position memory)
The auto tilt away function can only operate when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off, the driver seat belt has been unfastened and the driver’s
seat movement (P. 834) is in a setting other than off.
When the driver fastens the seat belt again, the steering wheel will return to the
original position. (P. 78)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
92
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Automatic anti-glare function
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind,
the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Type A
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indica-
tor illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the func-
tion to OFF mode. (The indicator
also turns off.)
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confir-
mation of the rear view in accordance with the driver's seating posture.
Indicator
93
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Type B
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indica-
tor illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Pressing turns the function
to OFF mode. (The indicator also
turns off.)
Pressing turns the function
to ON mode. (The indicator also
turns on.)
Indicator
■To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
94
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
95
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Outside rear view mirrors
Folding the mirrors (manual type)
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle's rear.
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
Pressing the same switch again
will put the switch in neutral.
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP 1
STEP 2
96
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Automatically folding and extending the mirrors (power type)
■Using the switch
Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to return them.
■Setting automatic mode
Automatic mode allows the folding
or extending of the mirrors to be
linked to locking/unlocking of the
doors.
Press the “AUTO” switch to set
automatic mode.
The indicator will come on.
Indicator
■Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■Linked mirror function when reversing
When the mirror select switch is in the “L” or “R” position, the outside rear view mir-
rors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to
give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, move the mirror select
switch to the neutral position (between “L” and “R”).
97
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■When the mirrors are fogged up
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on
the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers.
(P. 3 61 )
■Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position mem-
ory)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 76)
■Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mir-
ror to reduce reflected light. (P. 92)
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
98
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Window lock switch
Press the switch to lock the pas-
senger window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
The passenger windows can still be
opened and closed using the
power window switches on the
driver’s side even if the lock switch
is on.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*:To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the oppo-
site direction.
Indicator
99
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the rel-
evant door.
●After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power win-
dow switch in the one-touch closing position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
●If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has
closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-
dow has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
100
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■Door lock linked window operation
●The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(P. 793 )
●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.
(P. 49)
■When the battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the battery.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 83 4)
CAUTION
■Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.
The driver is responsible for instructing children not to operate the power win-
dows.
■Jam protection function
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes. Also, the jam protection does not operate when the
power window switch is pulled up continually to close the windows.
101
1
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Before driving
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up
and down.
■Opening and closing
Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position to
reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully
open the moon roof.
Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.
■Tilting up and down
T
ilts the moon roof up
*
Tilts the moon roof down
*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.
: If equipped
102
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■The moon roof can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It
cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is
closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■Door lock linked moon roof operation
●The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 793 )
●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 49 )
103
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
●If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 sec-
onds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 sec-
ond. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up
position and stops.
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch
again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up posi-
tion.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have
to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
“CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for
approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check
to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure
correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 8 3 4)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
104
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. The driver
is responsible for instructing children not to operate the moon roof.
■Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
105
1
Before driving
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
■Before refueling the vehicle
●Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
●Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 1 07)
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Press the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
106
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
■When the fuel filler door cannot be opened by pressing the inside switch
Open the back door and lift the deck board up. (P. 7 76)
STEP 1
With a compact spare tire only:
Remove the spare tire cover.
Remove the auxiliary box.
STEP 2
STEP 3
107
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
■Fuel types
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)
Pull the lever.
Install the auxiliary box using the clips.
STEP 4
STEP 5
108
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted
metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static
electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressur-
ized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to
come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck
●Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off
●Do not top off the fuel tank
■When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious
injury.
109
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted
surface.
110
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guaran-
tee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
Vehicles with a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio sys-
tem
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is oper-
ating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio
system
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is oper-
ating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
111
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
This system meets the certification requirements of Radio Law.
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause inter-
ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
112
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
●A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using
the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.
(The doors will lock again automatically.)
●The hood is opened.
●Some models: The back door window is tapped or broken.
113
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
■Setting the alarm system
Vehicles with a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio sys-
tem
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors.
The system will be set automati-
cally after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio
system
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors.
The system will be set automati-
cally after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
●Unlock the doors.
●Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
114
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following:
●Nobody is in the vehicle.
●The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■Tr i g g er in g o f t he al arm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
■Alarm-operated door lock
●When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent
intruders.
●Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make
sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery.
●A person inside the vehicle opens a door
or the hood.
●The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked.
115
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
116
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (for U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the
vehicle to reduce vehicle theft
by facilitating the tracing and
recovery of parts from stolen
vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.
117
1
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 68 )
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 68)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily opera-
ble. (P. 68 )
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 9 0 )
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 81)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 8 3 )
118
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
119
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passen-
ger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
120
1-7. Safety information
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
Front SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
Rear SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
SRS curtain shield airbags
●Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
●Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the
vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover
121
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS airbag system components
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
Front side airbags
Front passenger occupant
classification system
(ECU and sensors)
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Rear side airbags
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Curtain shield and rear side
airbag sensors
Driver's seat belt buckle
switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensors
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Door sensors
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters
122
1-7. Safety information
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sen-
sor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information
obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram
above. This information includes crash severity and occupant informa-
tion. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills
the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-
pants.
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot
for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
●For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a
severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to
the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to
push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants
to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emer-
gency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 642)
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 -
18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situa-
tions:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which
can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which
the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
123
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt preten-
sioners will activate.
●The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no pas-
senger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the
front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoc-
cupied. (P. 13 2 )
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the
impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding
with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the
illustration.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or vehicle falling
●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
124
1-7. Safety information
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal colli-
sion. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in
a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side colli-
sion.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
●Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the front
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
125
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side collision.
■When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags has been inflated.
●Collision from the front
●Collision from the rear
●Pitching end over end
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
●A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag
or lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
126
1-7. Safety information
●The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) con-
taining the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
127
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still main-
taining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
128
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the
front passenger seat. (P. 137 )
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles but the
seat belt extender has not also been fas-
tened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the
SRS front airbags will judge that the driver
and front passenger are wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the SRS front air-
bags may not activate correctly in a colli-
sion, resulting in death or serious injury in
the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
129
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seats toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
130
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbags will deploy, be sure
to remove it.
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the
side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door
or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off
any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by
your Lexus dealer.
●Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steer-
ing wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee air-
bags deploy.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
●Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and may
cause death or serious injury, should the
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
131
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front passenger airbag may
not deploy in the event of a collision.
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications with-
out consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rails
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
●Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or winches
●Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
132
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sys-
tem. This system detects the condition of the front passenger seat and acti-
vates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Without a navigation system or
the Lexus Display Audio system
With a navigation system or the
Lexus Display Audio system
133
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■Adult*1
■Child *3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“A I R B AG
ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“A I R B AG
OFF”*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
134
1-7. Safety information
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Not illuminated
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated or
activated*6
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“A I R B AG
OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
135
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passen-
ger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 137)
*5: If the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to
install the child restraint system properly. (P. 141)
*6: Activated only in cases of side impact
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the
passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury
in the event of collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
136
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-
minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn cor-
rectly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the pas-
senger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 141)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection sys-
tem. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
137
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropri-
ate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 141)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
138
1-7. Safety information
Forward facing Convertible seat
Booster seat
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and
use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 83)
139
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the wind-
shield, or between you and the vehicle's interior. This may cause death or serious
injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
●Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child if a rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front
passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether
strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether
strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possi-
ble and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
140
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the
SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
141
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt.
Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not com-
patible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outer rear seats. (Buttons
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (P. 8 3)
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each rear seat.
142
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle adjustment lever.
Return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position. (P. 72)
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower straps
onto the LATCH anchors. If the
child restraint has a top tether
strap, the top tether strap should
be latched onto the top tether
strap anchor bracket.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Canada only
STEP 3
143
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the LATCH
anchors. If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top tether
strap should be latched onto the
top tether strap anchor bracket.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 148 )
Canada only
STEP 3
STEP 4
144
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■Rear-facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle adjustment lever.
Return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position. (P. 72)
Place the child restraint system on
the rear seat facing the rear of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
145
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt can-
not be extended.
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Forward-facing Convertible seat
Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle adjustment lever.
Return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position. (P. 72 )
Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
146
1-7. Safety information
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt can-
not be extended.
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 1 48)
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
147
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Booster seat
Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle adjustment lever.
Return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position. (P. 72 )
Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the child
restraint system according to the
manufacturer's instructions and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 8 3)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
148
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint system
using a seat belt or the LATCH
anchors, and remove the head
restraint.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
STEP 1
STEP 2
149
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Replace the head restraint and lift
it up to the uppermost lock posi-
tion.
STEP 3
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder
belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discom-
fort to the child. (P. 8 5)
150
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passen-
gers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
●When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seat
cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle. The
seatbacks must be adjusted to the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint sys-
tem cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in
the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●When using the LATCH system, move the seat as far back as possible and adjust
the seatback as upright as possible.
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
●If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat so that it
does not interfere with the child restraint
system.
●Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated. Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
151
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to
ensure that it has been securely installed.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or
serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden
swerve or accident.
152
1-7. Safety information
When driving 2
153
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.................. 154
Engine (ignition) switch......... 165
Automatic transmission
(6-speed models) .................. 171
Automatic transmission
(8-speed models)................. 178
Turn signal lever....................... 187
Parking brake........................... 189
Horn............................................ 190
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters................. 191
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 194
Multi-information
display.................................... 200
Head-up display ..................... 206
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch....................... 211
Fog light switch ........................ 215
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 217
Rear window wiper and
washer .................................... 224
Headlight cleaner switch..... 226
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control......................... 227
Dynamic radar cruise
control.................................... 232
Intuitive parking assist.......... 245
Rear view monitor system
(rear view mirror-attached
type) ........................................ 255
Rear view monitor system
(vehicles with the Lexus
Display Audio system)....... 264
Driving assist systems........... 269
All-wheel drive lock
switch....................................... 275
Hill-start assist control .......... 276
Pre-Collision System............ 278
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) .......... 286
2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle
precautions........................... 292
Cargo and luggage ............... 296
Vehicle load limits................... 301
Winter driving tips................. 302
Trailer towing .......................... 306
Dinghy towing......................... 323
154
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
Starting off on a steep uphill
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to
D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■Starting the engine
P. 165
■Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 171, 178)
Release the parking brake. (P. 18 9 )
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P or N. (P. 171, 178)
■ Parking the vehicle
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 189)
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 171, 178)
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
155
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■When starting off on an uphill
The hill-start assist control is available. (P. 276 )
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is
due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driv-
ing conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
●When the accelerator pedal is released
■Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recom-
mended:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
●For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
156
2-1. Driving procedures
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake sys-
tem needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bed-
ding down operation.
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 808)
■Eco-friendly driving
■Customization
Setting of Eco Driving Indicator Light can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 83 4)
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driv-
ing), Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on.
When the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco
driving, and when the vehicle is stopped, the
light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in
the following conditions:
●The shift lever is in anything other than D.
●The paddle shift switch is operated. (if
equipped)
●The driving mode is set to snow mode.
(P. 173, 180)
●The vehicle speed is approximately 80
mph (130 km/h) or higher.
157
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals
properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an acci-
dent.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering perfor-
mance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause
driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
●Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
158
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine
from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
●During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while
driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to
these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you
should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way: P. 804
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effec-
tiveness. (P. 171, 178)
●When stopped on an incline, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent
the vehicle from rolling backward or forward, causing an accident.
●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents, resulting
in death or serious injury.
●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
159
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
160
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.
161
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical com-
ponents.
●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such
as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded
or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
●Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place contain-
ers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs
or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metal-
lized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to
act as a lens, causing a fire.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after
turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a seri-
ous health hazard.
162
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odor-
less. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to
have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so
may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health
hazard.
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking the vehicle
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side
of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
163
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehi-
cle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel
the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving,
as this may restrain driving torque.
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at
the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 774)
164
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle:
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following:
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transaxle,
transfer (AWD models), differential, etc.
●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft (AWD models), bearings and suspen-
sion joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
165
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes.
■Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will turn green. If the
indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 30 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started from
any “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode.
■Stopping the engine
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the parking brake. (P. 189)
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that the indicator on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
166
2-1. Driving procedures
■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to off.
167
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead be
turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn
the switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is illuminated in amber and then press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch once.
Check that the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is off.
■Auto power off function
When the shift lever is in P, if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode with the engine not running for more than 20 minutes (ACCESSORY mode)
or one hour (IGNITION ON mode), the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will auto-
matically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge.
Do not leave the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
■Operation of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
When operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch, one short, firm press is
enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press
and hold the switch.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 45
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 42
■Note for the entry function
P. 43
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
168
2-1. Driving procedures
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 110)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Steering lock
After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and opening and closing the
doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operat-
ing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again automatically cancels the steering
lock.
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended
if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case,
refrain from operating the engine. After about 2 seconds, the steering lock motor
will resume functioning.
■When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 70 1
The green indicator light on the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will flash and a mes-
sage will be shown on the multi-information
display. Press the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch again while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
169
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the acceler-
ator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution while driving
If the vehicle begins to slide due to engine failure or other circumstances, do not
lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activa-
tion of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 8 0 4 )
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it
more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
170
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
●Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
●If the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is illuminated, the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always
check that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
●Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the
engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the
vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.
■When starting the engine
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
If the “ENGINE START STOP” seems to be operating somewhat differently than
usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your
Lexus dealer immediately.
171
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Automatic transmission (6-speed models)
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
172
2-1. Driving procedures
■Shift position purpose
*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the
driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended
for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible
gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary
upshifting.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle/starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*1
SS mode driving*2 (P. 1 74)
173
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Selecting snow mode
Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road sur-
faces such as snow.
Press the menu switch.
The multi-information display
will change modes to electronic
features control mode.
Press the “” or “” switch
until “ECT SNOW” appears.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “ON”.
The “ECT SNOW” indicator will
be displayed.
Each pressing of the switch
turns snow mode on and off.
Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.
STEP 1
STEP 2
174
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to the S position. The shift range can
then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches (if
equipped) or the shift lever. Changing the shift range allows restriction of
the upper limit of the gears to be used, preventing unnecessary upshifting
and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to “5” or “4” accord-
ing to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to “3” if
AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(P. 176)
■Shift ranges and their functions
●Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle
speed and driving conditions. But the gear is limited according to
selected shift range.
●You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
●A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
175
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Selecting shift ranges in the D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift
switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+”
paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the
upper limit of the gears to be used, preventing unnecessary upshifting
and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
Upshifting
Downshifting
To return to normal D position
driving, the “+” paddle shift switch
must be held down for a period of
time.
■Shift ranges and their functions
P. 174
176
2-1. Driving procedures
■When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position (vehicles with pad-
dle shift switches)
When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will be
automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one gear
lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
■Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position (vehicles with
paddle shift switches)
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
●When the vehicle comes to a stop
●When range 6 is selected and the accelerator pedal is depressed
●If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
■Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned off after driving in snow mode.
■S mode
●When the shift range is “5” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the
shift range to “6”.
●To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.
●To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that automatically
selects a higher shift range when the fluid temperature is high.
■AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance
and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shift-
ing the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
177
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■ When driving with cruise control or radar cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and downshifting
to 5 or 4 because cruise control or radar cruise control will not be canceled.
(P. 227, 232)
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 79 1
■If S does not come on or D comes on even after shifting the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same as manner as when the
shift lever is in D.)
■Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (The warning buzzer will
sound twice.)
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehi-
cle skidding to the side or spinning.
178
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission (8-speed models)
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
■Shift position purpose
*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle/starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*
MM mode driving (P. 18 3 )
179
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Shift position uses
Shift position Display Function Purpose
Normal D
position driv-
ing
Gears
between 1 and
8 are auto-
matically
selected
according to
driving condi-
tions
(paddle shift
switches activated)
Shift range
selection
(P. 181)
Allows opti-
mum use of
engine brak-
ing
Individual gear
selection
(P. 183)
Allows the
driver to select
gears for
sporty driving
180
2-1. Driving procedures
■Selecting snow mode
Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road sur-
faces such as snow.
Press the menu switch.
The multi-information display
will change modes to electronic
features control mode.
Press the “” or “” switch
until “ECT SNOW” appears.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “ON”.
The “ECT SNOW” indicator will
be displayed.
Each pressing of the switch
turns snow mode on and off.
Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.
STEP 1
STEP 2
181
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift
switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+”
paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the
highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of
engine braking force to be selected.
Higher shift range
Lower shift range
The selected shift range, from 1 to
8, will be displayed in the meter
cluster.
To return to normal D position
driving, the “+” paddle shift switch
must be held down for a period of
time.
182
2-1. Driving procedures
■Shift ranges and their functions
*: “D” is also displayed to indicate the shift position.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift
range.
Meter cluster dis-
play*Function
8Gears between 1 and 8 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
7Gears between 1 and 7 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
6Gears between 1 and 6 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
5Gears between 1 and 5 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
4Gears between 1 and 4 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
3Gears between 1 and 3 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
2Gears between 1 and 2 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
1The gear is set at 1
183
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Selecting gears in the M position
To enter M mode, shift the shift lever to the M position. Gears can then be
selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you
to drive in the gear of your choosing.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The gear changes once every time
the shift lever or paddle shift switch
is operated.
When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or
paddle shift switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically
changed in the following situations:
●When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
●When the automatic transmission fluid or engine coolant temperature
is low.
●When engine speed is higher than necessary. (upshift only)
184
2-1. Driving procedures
■Gear functions
*: “M” is also displayed to indicate the shift position.
■When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position
●When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will
be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one
gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
●If the “-” paddle shift switch is operated when a shift range is selected while in
the D position, the shift range may be lowered by two ranges or more in accor-
dance with the driving conditions.
■Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
●When the vehicle comes to a stop
●If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time in
one shift range
Meter cluster
display*Function
8The gear is fixed at 8th gear
7The gear is fixed at 7th gear
6The gear is fixed at 6th gear
5The gear is fixed at 5th gear
4The gear is fixed at 4th gear
3The gear is fixed at 3rd gear
2The gear is fixed at 2nd gear
1The gear is fixed at 1st gear
185
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Downshift restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ When driving with cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in M mode and downshifting
to 7, 6, 5 or 4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 227)
■Automatic deactivation of snow mode
If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off after driving in snow mode, the
mode is automatically deactivated.
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 79 1
■Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped
When the vehicle comes to a stop, the transmission will automatically downshift to
allow you to start off in 1st gear.
■If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed
If the automatic transmission fluid tempera-
ture warning message is displayed while
driving, make sure you return to normal D
position driving and reduce speed by eas-
ing off the accelerator pedal. Stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to the
P position and let the engine idle until the
warning message goes out.
When the warning message goes out, the
vehicle can be driven again.
If the warning message does not go out
after waiting a while, have your vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
186
2-1. Driving procedures
■AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver perfor-
mance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. How-
ever, operating the “-” paddle shift switch will restrict the function’s operation. (Shift-
ing the shift lever to the M position cancels the function.)
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehi-
cle skidding to the side or spinning.
187
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Turn signal lever
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intention of the
driver:
Type A
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The right hand signals will flash
3 times.
Lane change to the left (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
188
2-1. Driving procedures
■Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
■To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change
Operate the lever in the opposite direction.
■Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 83 4)
Type B
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The right hand signals will flash
3 times.
Lane change to the left (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
189
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking brake
■Usage in winter time
P. 30 2
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components over-
heating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
To set the parking brake, fully
depress the parking brake pedal
with your left foot while
depressing the brake pedal with
your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
Canada
U.S.A.
190
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
191
2
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 200)
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to
record and display different distances independently.
Shift position and shift range display
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 171, 178)
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
192
2-2. Instrument cluster
Changing the display
Switches between odometer and
trip meter displays. When the trip
meter is displayed, pressing and
holding the button will reset the
trip meter.
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
■The meters and display illuminate when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
193
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the
red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check
the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 799)
194
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster, center panel
and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s
various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all indica-
tors and warning lights illuminated.
■Instrument cluster
195
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Center panel
With a navigation system
With the Lexus Display Audio system
Without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
196
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Outside rear view mirrors (if equipped)
197
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehi-
cle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 187 )
(if equipped)
Intuitive parking assist
indicator
(P. 245 )
Headlight high beam indi-
cator (P. 213) Slip indicator
(P. 270, 276)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 21 1 )
VSC off indicator
(P. 271)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 211)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (P. 156)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 215 )
(if equipped)
SRS airbag on-off indica-
tor (P. 132)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 227, 232)
(if equipped)
SRS airbag on-off indica-
tor (P. 132)
(if equipped)
Radar cruise control indi-
cator (P. 232)
*1, 2
*1
*1
*1
*1
198
2-2. Instrument cluster
*1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few sec-
onds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer, for details.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light comes on when the system is turned off. The light flashes faster
than usual to indicate that the system is operating.
*4: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indica-
tors illuminate in the following situations:
• When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode while the BSM main switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not
turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(AWD models
only)
All-wheel drive lock indi-
cator (P. 275 )
“ECT SNOW” indicator
(P. 173, 180)
(if equipped)
BSM indicator
(P. 286)
(if equipped)
Pre-collision system
warning light (P. 278)
(if equipped)
BSM outside rear view
mirror indicators
(P. 286)
*1
*1
*1, 3
*4
199
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to
help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehi-
cle’s systems. (P. 744)
*1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a
few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer, for details.
*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
(U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada)
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
(if equipped) (for driver) (for front
passenger)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1, 2
*1
*1
200
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-
related data including the current outside air temperature.
■Multi-information switches
“” “” switch
Changes items.
“ENTER” switch
Turns on/off electronic features
controls and changes customi-
zation settings.
Menu switch
Changes mode from normal
display to electronic features,
customization or back to normal
display.
201
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Display contents
Trip information contents Switching display items
Current fuel consumption
Press the “” or “” switch.
Average fuel consumption after
refueling
Average fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed
Cruising range
Multi-information display off
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Dis-
play
202
2-2. Instrument cluster
Electronic features control contents Setting electronic features controls
Intuitive parking assist
(if equipped) P. 245
Snow mode P. 173, 180
Other contents Details
Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature
Dynamic radar cruise control display
(if equipped) (P. 232)
Automatically displayed when using
dynamic radar cruise control
Customization (P. 834)
Settings of functions such as the
door lock and light illumination time
can be changed
Warning message (P. 75 4 )
Automatically displayed when a mal-
function occurs in one of the vehi-
cle's systems
203
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Trip information
■Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
■Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refu-
eled
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset
• The function can be reset by pushing the “ENTER” switch for longer
than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset
The function can be reset by pushing the “ENTER” switch for longer than
one second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.
■Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that dis-
played.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off. If the
vehicle is refueled without turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
off, the display may not be updated.
■Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
P. 20 4
204
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Electronic features control can be turned on/off when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Conditions for ending electronic features control
In the following situations, the electronic features control will end:
●The menu switch is pressed.
●The dynamic radar cruise control is operated (if equipped).
●Intuitive parking assist starts operating (if equipped).
●No action is performed for some time after the electronic features control
screen is displayed.
●A warning message appears after the electronic features control screen is dis-
played.
■Eco Driving Indicator
■Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will
turn on.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests Eco driving range with current
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.
Zone of Eco driving
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If Zone of Eco driving is exceeded, the
right of Eco Driving Indicator Zone Dis-
play will blink and Eco Driving Indicator
Light will turn off.
205
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal informa-
tion display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. available languages) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 8 3 4)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
When operating the electronic features control while driving, take extra notice of
the vehicle's surrounding area.
206
2-2. Instrument cluster
Head-up display
The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other infor-
mation onto the windshield.
Head-up display
Display brightness will change
automatically according to the
brightness of the surrounding
area.
Head-up display main switch
Display contrast adjustment
switch
Display brightness can be
adjusted to the desired level.
Display position adjustment
switch
: If equipped
207
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Head-up display contents
In addition to vehicle speed, the following information will be displayed:
Audio display
Displays audio information for
approximately 3 seconds when
the audio system is operated
Shift position and shift range
display
Displays the selected shift posi-
tion or selected shift range
(P. 171, 178)
Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol display (if equipped)
Displays the approach warning
message (P. 759)
Pre-collision system display
(if equipped)
Displays the brake warning
(P. 759)
Turn-by-turn navigation
display*
Displays a notification of
upcoming intersections during
navigation system route guid-
ance
Vehicle speed display
*: Refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
208
2-2. Instrument cluster
Head-up display main switch
Pressing the switch turns the head-
up display on/off and changes the
vehicle speed display units as fol-
lows:
Vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
OFF ON (mph) ON
(km/h) OFF
Except vehicles sold in the
U.S.A.
OFF ON (km/h) ON
(mph) OFF
Display adjustment
Adjusting display contrast
Brighter
Darker
Adjusting display position
Higher
Lower
209
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Display customization
The audio mode display and/or the shift position and shift range display
can be shown or hidden.
Press and hold the head-up display
main switch changes the display to
the display on/off mode.
Press the head-up display main
switch to select the desired setting
item. Press and hold the head-up
display main switch to turn the dis-
play on/off.
Customization can be performed
when the head-up display is on and
the vehicle is traveling at less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
■Brightness of the head-up display
The headlight control sensor detects the brightness of the area surrounding the
head-up display and adjusts the brightness accordingly. (P. 213)
■Head-up display
The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sun-
glasses, especially polarized sunglasses.
Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.
CAUTION
■Before using the head-up display
Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not inter-
fere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image's position or brightness
may obstruct the driver's view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
210
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to components
●Do not place anything on the head-up display opening.
●If an object falls into the opening of the
head-up display, remove it immediately.
Also, avoid spilling water or other liquids
near the head-up display opening as this
may cause mechanical damage.
211
2
When driving
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Type A
The headlights and
side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, day-
time running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on and off
automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
is in IGNITION ON
mode)
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
The daytime running
lights turn off.
212
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The headlights and
side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, day-
time running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on and off
automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
is in IGNITION ON
mode)
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
213
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on
the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams with
the headlights on or off.
■Daytime running light system
●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the daytime running lights
turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is
released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
Type A: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel
economy.
■Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-
shield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
214
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■Automatic light off system
●When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The lights turn off immediately
if on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)
●When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off
and the driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION
ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or .
If any of the doors is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
■Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■Light reminder buzzer (headlights)
A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off or turned
to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the headlights are
turned on.
■Illuminated entry system
If the wireless remote control switch is used to unlock the vehicle when the light
switch is in and the surrounding area is dark, the parking light turns on.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 83 4)
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
215
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
and fog.
Type A
Turns the front fog
lights off
Turns the front fog
lights on
216
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
Type B
Turns the front fog
lights off
Turns the front fog
lights on
217
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Windshield wipers and washer
■Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper
intervals can be also adjusted.
Off
Intermittent wind-
shield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed wind-
shield wiper operation
Temporary operation
218
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
If the headlights are on, the
headlight cleaners will operate
once.
219
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
■Rain-sensing windshield wipers
When is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts
wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
When is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted as
follows by turning the switch ring:
Type A
Off
Rain-sensing wiper
operation
Low speed wiper
operation
High speed wiper
operation
Temporary operation
220
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
Off
Rain-sensing wiper
operation
Low speed wiper
operation
High speed wiper
operation
Temporary operation
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)
221
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode:
●Intermittent wiper interval
●Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention
wiper sweep occurs)
When low speed wiper operation is selected, wiper operation will be switched from
low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the mode can-
not be switched.)
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts. (After oper-
ating several times, the wipers
operate one more time after a
short delay to prevent dripping.)
If the headlights are on, the
headlight cleaners will operate
once.
222
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
●If the wiper switch is turned to the position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show
that AUTO mode is activated.
●When the sensor sensitivity ring is turned toward high while in AUTO mode, the
wipers will operate once to indicate that the sensor sensitivity is enhanced.
●If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194F (90C) or higher, or 5F
(-15C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur.
In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the wind-
shield washer fluid reservoir.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles with
rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or any-
thing else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The
fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
●The raindrop sensor judges the amount
of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
223
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
224
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Rear window wiper and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:
Type A
Off
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
225
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
■The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is operated continu-
ally.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Type B
Off
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
226
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight cleaner switch
■The headlight cleaner can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight
switch is turned on.
■Windshield washer linked operation
When the windshield washer is operated with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
in IGNITION ON mode and the headlights on, the headlight cleaner will operate
once. (P. 217)
NOTICE
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
: If equipped
227
2
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
: If equipped
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicator
Display
Cruise control switch
■Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
STEP 1
228
2-4. Using other driving systems
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” will be displayed.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
■Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continu-
ally until the lever is released.
STEP 2
229
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
230
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected. (vehicles with-
out paddle shift switch)
●The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the
paddle shift. (vehicles with paddle shift switch)
●Vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by
first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever
down to set the new speed.
■Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situa-
tions.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●Enhanced VSC is activated. (vehicles with enhanced VSC)
●VSC is activated. (vehicles with VSC)
■If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the but-
ton again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
231
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death
or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
232
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
: If equipped
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in
order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Indicator (vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode)
Indicator (constant speed
control mode)
Display
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button
Cruise control switch
■Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator
will come on.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
STEP 1
233
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” will be displayed.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
■Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 sec-
onds the lever is held
STEP 2
234
2-4. Using other driving systems
When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 sec-
onds the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 238), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continu-
ally until the lever is released.
■Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pressing the button changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as
follows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is set automatically to long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of
you, the preceding vehicle mark
will also be displayed.
Preceding vehicle mark
235
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances
shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with
vehicle speed.
■Canceling and resuming the speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the cruise control and returns
vehicle speed to the set
speed.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 164 ft. (50 m)
Medium Approximately 132 ft. (40 m)
Short Approximately 82 ft. (25 m)
236
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up
to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-
to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable follow-
ing distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is nec-
essary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the
system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in
on the vehicle ahead.
237
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the
set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient auto-
matic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this
would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a
vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance.
■Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not
occur:
●When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
●Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
●At the instant the accelerator is applied
238
2-4. Using other driving systems
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode. When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehi-
cle will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not there are other
vehicles in the lane ahead.
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed con-
trol mode.
(Push the lever forward and
hold for approximately one sec-
ond.)
Constant speed control mode indi-
cator will come on.
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance control mode, push
the lever forward again and hold
for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been
set, it is not possible to return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
239
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
If the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned off and then turned
to IGNITION ON mode again, the
vehicle will automatically return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
Adjusting the speed setting:
P. 233
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P. 2 35
■Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
●Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift.
(vehicles with paddle shift switch)
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
■Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the follow-
ing situations:
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●Enhanced VSC is activated. (vehicles with enhanced VSC)
●VSC is activated. (vehicles with VSC)
●The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
●The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper switch is set
to the AUTO mode or the high speed wiper operation position).
●When the snow mode is set.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
240
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
●Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
set vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●Enhanced VSC is activated. (vehicles with enhanced VSC)
●VSC is activated. (vehicles with VSC)
■Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plas-
tic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
■Warning lights, messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 759 )
Grille cover
Radar sensor
241
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
242
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropri-
ate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehi-
cles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determin-
ing the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
●Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to deter-
mine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
●Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.
■To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
243
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●At entrances to expressways
●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
●When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
●When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
■When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 237) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident
may result.
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●Vehicles that are not moving
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
244
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may
result:
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment etc.)
●When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
●When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
●Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
●Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
245
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Intuitive parking assist
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via
the multi-information display, screen (vehicles with the Lexus Display
Audio system) and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a
garage is conducted. Always check the surrounding area when using this
system.
■Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
■Setting the intuitive parking assist mode
Press the menu switch.
The multi-information display
will change modes to elec-
tronic features control mode.
Press the “” or “” switch
until the intuitive parking
assist mark appears in the
multi-information display.
STEP 1
: If equipped
246
2-4. Using other driving systems
Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multi-
information display and screen (vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio
system) depending on the position and distance to the obstacle.
■Multi-information display
Front corner sensor operation
Front center sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Rear center sensor operation
Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “ON”.
The intuitive parking assist indi-
cator will be displayed.
Each pressing of the switch
turns the intuitive parking assist
on and off.
When on, the buzzer sounds to
inform the driver that the system
is operational.
Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.
STEP 2
247
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Screen (vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system)
When the vehicle is moving for-
ward
The graphic is automatically dis-
played when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 252)
When the vehicle is moving back-
ward
A simplified image is displayed on
the right upper corner of the
screen when an obstacle is
detected.
248
2-4. Using other driving systems
The distance display and buzzer
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
The site of the obstacle will flash (detection level 4 only).
■Front corner sensors
Detection
level
Multi-information
display
Approximate dis-
tance to obstacle Buzzer
21.6 to 1.2 ft.
(50 to 37.5 cm) Medium
31.2 to 0.8 ft.
(37.5 to 25 cm) Fast
40.8 ft. (25 cm) or
less Continuous
249
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Front center sensors
■Rear corner sensors
Detection
level
Multi-information
display
Approximate dis-
tance to obstacle Buzzer
1 3.3 to 1.6 ft.
(100 to 50 cm) Slow
21.6 to 1.3 ft.
(50 to 40 cm) Medium
31.3 to 1.0 ft.
(40 to 30 cm) Fast
41.0 ft. (30 cm) or
less Continuous
Detection
level
Multi-information
display
Approximate dis-
tance to obstacle Buzzer
21.6 to 1.2 ft.
(50 to 37.5 cm) Medium
31.2 to 0.8 ft.
(37.5 to 25 cm) Fast
40.8 ft. (25 cm) or
less Continuous
250
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Rear center sensors
Detection
level
Multi-information
display
Approximate dis-
tance to obstacle Buzzer
14.9 to 2.0 ft.
(150 to 60 cm) Slow
22.0 to 1.5 ft.
(60 to 45 cm) Medium
31.5 to 1.2 ft.
(45 to 35 cm) Fast
41.2 ft. (35 cm) or
less Continuous
251
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles
that are extremely close to the
vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
252
2-4. Using other driving systems
Customization of the intuitive parking assist (vehicle with the Lexus
Display Audio system)
The buzzer volume, display and buzzer timing and display of the graphic
on the screen can be customized.
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
Alert volume setting
Display on/off
Alert distance setting
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
■The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
●Front corner sensors:
• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
●Front center sensors:
• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
●Rear corner and center sensors:
• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in R.
STEP 5
253
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Sensor detection information
●Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
• A sensor is frozen.
• A sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,
air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they
are.
●The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
•Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
■If a message is displayed
P. 75 4
254
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 83 4)
CAUTION
■Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possi-
bly cause an accident.
●Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
●Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
■Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
■Conditions possibly indicating system malfunctions
If any of the following occurs, the system may be malfunctioning due to a sensor fail-
ure etc. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●The buzzer does not sound when the intuitive parking assist mode is set.
●The sensor operation display flashes and the buzzer sounds even when no obsta-
cle is detected.
●An area of the sensors is hit or subjected to a strong impact.
●Either bumper is hit.
●The sensor operation display remains on even though no buzzer sounds.
255
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Rear view monitor system (rear view mirror-attached type)
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of
the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in
reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner
as that of the rear view mirror.
The rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in the R
position.
The screen turns off in the fol-
lowing situations:
• The shift lever is shifted out
of R.
• The screen remains on for
approximately 5 minutes.
: If equipped
256
2-4. Using other driving systems
■The rear view monitor system can be operated when
The shift lever is in R, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■Changing display modes
The rear view monitor display mode can be changed while the screen is on.
●To temporarily disable the rear view monitor system
●To constantly disable the rear view monitor system
●To re-enable the rear view monitor system
Press . The indicator will turn green.
Press .
The indicator will turn amber.
The system will be re-enabled once the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
off and then turned to IGNITION ON
mode.
Press and hold for 12 to 15 seconds.
The screen will turn off and on after 6 sec-
onds. Keep pressing the button until the
screen turns back off. The indicator will
flash amber.
The system will not automatically turn on
again after the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is off and then turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
257
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Selecting a language (English, French or Spanish)
Press and hold for 6 to 12
seconds.
The screen will turn on and the
indicator will turn green.
Press .
Each time is pressed
and released, the language
changes. A message will flash
in the mirror for 5 seconds
after the button is released,
indicating that the change has
been completed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
258
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Rear view monitor guide lines
Guide lines are displayed on the screen.
Guidelines shown differ from those
shown on the actual screen.
Vehicle width extension guide lines
(blue)
These lines indicate the estimated vehi-
cle width extension.
Distance guide line (blue)
This line indicates a position on the
ground about 3 ft. (1 m) behind on the
ground of the rear bumper of your vehi-
cle.
Distance guide line (red)
This line indicates a position on the
ground about 1.5ft. (0.5 m) behind on
the ground of the rear bumper of your
vehicle.
Vehicle center guide lines (blue)
These lines indicate the estimated vehi-
cle center on the ground.
259
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Displayed area
■Driving precautions
The area detected by the camera is limited.
Object which are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper cannot
be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road
conditions.
The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.
Corners of bumper
When the grade behind the vehicle slopes
up sharply, objects appear to be farther
away than they actually are.
260
2-4. Using other driving systems
When the grade behind the vehicle slopes
down sharply, objects appear to be closer
than they actually are.
The distance that appears on the screen
between three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as the
road) and the actual distance differ as fol-
lows.
In reality, C = A < B (C and A are equally far
away; B is farther than C and A). However,
on the screen, the situation appears to be A
< B < C.
On the screen, it appears that a truck is
parking about 1.5 ft (0.5 m) away. How-
ever, in reality if you back up to point A, you
will hit the track.
261
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Rear view monitor system camera
■Smear effect
The rear view monitor system camera is
located on the back door as shown in the
illustration.
In the following cases, it may become diffi-
cult to see the images on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly.
●The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at
night.
●The temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
●Water droplets are on the camera lens
or humidity is high, such as when it
rains.
●Foreign matter, such as snow or mud,
adheres to the camera lens.
●The sun or headlights are shining
directly into the camera lens.
●A bright object such as a white wall is
reflected in the mirror surface over the
monitor.
●The camera has scratches or dirt on it.
If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected
off the vehicle body, is picked up by the
camera, a smear effect* characteristic to
the camera may occur.
*: Smear effectA phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked up by
the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have
a vertical streak above and below it.
262
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Flicker effect
When the camera is used under fluorescent light, sodium lights, or mercury lights
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
CAUTION
■When using the rear view monitor system, observe the following precautions to
avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries:
●Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
●Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.
●Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed image
may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or not entirely
visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually and with the mirrors before proceeding.
●Always check the vehicle surrounding area, because the guide lines are ancillary
lines.
●The guide lines are ancillary lines and do not change even if the steering wheel is
turned.
●Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-
tances.
●Do not use the system if the back door is open.
263
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
NOTICE
■Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
●If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle
may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in
cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
●If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
●The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted
when the system is cold.
■Camera precautions
●As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
●Do not subject the camera to a strong impact.
●If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water drop-
lets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If
the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse. Do not rub hard.
●Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to
the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
●Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot
transmit a clear image.
●When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
●When replacing tires, please consult your Lexus dealer. If you replace the tires,
the area displayed on the screen may change.
264
2-4. Using other driving systems
Rear view monitor system (vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system)
: If equipped
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of
the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in
reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner
as that of the rear view mirror.
The rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in the R
position.
If the shift lever is shifted out of
R, the screen returns to the pre-
vious one.
265
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Displayed area
The area detected by the camera is limited.
Object which are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper cannot
be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road
conditions.
The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.
Corners of bumper
266
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Rear view monitor system camera
■Smear effect
The rear view monitor system camera is
located on the back door as shown in the
illustration.
In the following cases, it may become diffi-
cult to see the images on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly:
●The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at
night.
●The temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
●Water droplets are on the camera lens
or humidity is high, such as when it
rains.
●Foreign matter, such as snow or mud,
adheres to the camera lens.
●The sun or headlights are shining
directly into the camera lens.
●A bright object such as a white wall is
reflected in the mirror surface over the
monitor.
●The camera has scratches or dirt on it.
If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected
off the vehicle body, is picked up by the
camera, a smear effect* characteristic to
the camera may occur.
*: Smear effectA phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked up by
the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have
a vertical streak above and below it.
267
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Flicker effect
When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
CAUTION
■When using the rear view monitor system, observe the following precautions to
avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries:
●Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
●Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.
●Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed image
may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or not entirely
visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually and with the mirrors before proceeding.
●Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-
tances.
●Do not use the system if the back door is open.
268
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
■Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
●If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle
may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in
cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
●If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
●The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted
when the system is cold.
■Camera precautions
●As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
●Do not subject the camera to a strong impact.
●If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water drop-
lets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If
the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse. Do not rub hard.
●Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to
the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
●Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot
transmit a clear image.
●When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
●When replacing tires, please consult your Lexus dealer. If you replace the tires,
the area displayed on the screen may change.
269
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation
■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
■Hill-start assist control
P. 276
■EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel
■Active Torque Control 4WD system (AWD models)
Automatically switches from front-wheel drive to AWD (All-Wheel Drive)
according to driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable handling and
stability. Examples of conditions where the system will switch to AWD are
when cornering, going uphill, starting off or accelerating, and when the
road surface is slippery due to snow or rain etc.
270
2-4. Using other driving systems
When the VSC/TRAC systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping or if any of the drive wheels
spins, the slip indicator light flashes
to indicate that the VSC/TRAC
systems are operating.
■Enhanced VSC (Enhanced vehicle stability control) (if equipped)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road sur-
faces by controlling steering performance.
■VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management) (if equipped)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, and EPS systems.
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road sur-
faces by controlling the brakes and engine output.
■PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 278
■BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)
P. 286
271
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Disabling TRAC and/or VSC systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems
may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■Turning off the TRAC system only
To turn the TRAC system off,
quickly press and release the
switch.
A message will be shown on the
multi-information display.
Press the switch again to turn the
system back on.
■Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC sys-
tems off, press and hold the switch
for 3 seconds or more while the
vehicle is stopped.
A message will be shown on the
multi-information display and VSC
off indicator light will come on.
Press the switch again to turn the
systems back on.
272
2-4. Using other driving systems
■When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that
TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC off switch has not been pressed
TRAC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, VSC, TRAC and brake assist
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Reactivation of the TRAC /VSC systems
Turning off the engine after turning off the TRAC/VSC systems will automatically
reactivate them.
■Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed
When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehi-
cle speed increases. However, when both TRAC and VSC systems are turned off,
the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from over-
heating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should
return to normal within 10 minutes.
273
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively
worn tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-
tain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situa-
tions:
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
274
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
■When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn
the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
inflation pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed
on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driv-
ing assist systems, and may cause a system malfunction.
275
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
All-wheel drive lock switch (AWD models)
■All-wheel drive lock mode
●All-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the brakes are applied to ensure
the ABS and VSC systems operate effectively.
●All-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h).
All-wheel drive lock mode can be used when a large amount of drive power
needs to be applied to all the wheels, such as when the vehicle gets stuck in
mud and you need to free it.
Press the switch.
The torque of the engine is dis-
tributed to the rear wheels to
the maximum extent possible in
accordance with driving condi-
tions.
Pressing the switch again can-
cels all-wheel drive lock mode
and returns the active torque
control 4WD system to normal
mode. (P. 269)
276
2-4. Using other driving systems
Hill-start assist control
■Hill-start assist control can be operated when
●The shift lever is in a position other than P.
●The parking brake is not applied.
●The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
■Hill-start assist control
●While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically
applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high
mounted stoplight turn on.
●Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is
released.
●If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake
pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do
not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the sys-
tem still does not operate, check if the operating conditions explained above
have been met.
Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards
when starting on an incline or slippery slope.
To engage hill-start assist con-
trol, further depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is
stopped completely.
A buzzer will sound once to
indicate the system is activated.
The slip indicator will also start
flashing.
277
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Hill-start assist control buzzer
●When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once.
●In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the
buzzer will sound twice.
• No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds of
releasing the brake pedal.
• The shift lever is moved to P.
• The parking brake is applied.
• The brake pedal is depressed again.
• The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3 minutes.
●If a buzzer other than the hill-start assist control buzzer is sounding, the hill-start
assist control buzzer may not sound when the system is activated or canceled.
■If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■Hill-start assist control
●Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not oper-
ate effectively on extremely steep inclines or roads covered in ice.
●Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehi-
cle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start
assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline for an extended period of time, as
doing so may lead to an accident.
278
2-4. Using other driving systems
Pre-Collision System
When the radar sensor detects the possibility of a frontal collision, the pre-
collision system such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically
engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage.
■Pre-collision seat belts (front seat belts only)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-
collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 85)
However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when the
VSC system is disabled.
■Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed. The system may not warn the driver using a warning light,
warning display and buzzer when the system detects and judges braking
operations.
■Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the
driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system
determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically
applied to reduce the collision speed. Pre-collision braking can be dis-
abled using the pre-collision braking off switch.
: If equipped
279
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Disabling pre-collision braking
Pre-collision braking disabled
Pre-collision braking enabled
The pre-collision system warning
light turn on when pre-collision
braking is disabled.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor detects vehicles
or other obstacles on or near the
road ahead and determines
whether a collision is imminent
based on the position, speed, and
heading of the obstacles.
280
2-4. Using other driving systems
■The pre-collision system is operational when
●Pre-collision seat belts (type A):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle
running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision seat belts (type B):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle
running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
●Pre-collision braking:
• The pre-collision braking off switch is not pressed.
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle
running ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
281
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of collision
●When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
●When driving over a narrow iron bridge
●When there is a metal object on the road surface
●When driving on an uneven road surface
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
●When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
●When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
appears to be directly in the vehicle's line of travel
●When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic struc-
ture to appear directly in the vehicle's line of travel
●When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
●When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
●When passing through certain toll gates
●When driving on a bridge
●When passing through a tunnel
When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possi-
bility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it.
282
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be
occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcy-
cles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
●On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
●If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
●If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
●In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
●When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off
●When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
●When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
■Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system
When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the
sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automati-
cally disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision pos-
sibility.
■When there is a malfunction in the system, or if the system is temporarily unus-
able
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 744, 754)
283
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
284
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not overly rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There
are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind
the following important points.
●Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the
vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless
or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibil-
ity conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehi-
cle's surroundings.
●Assisting the driver in making correct judgment
When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data available
to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of
the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant
and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situ-
ation.
●Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-collision system's braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the
severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision
is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a col-
lision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a
dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to
ensure the safety of all involved.
285
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary in any of the following situations:
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment etc.)
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively:
●Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become inaccurate
or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact,
always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
286
2-4. Using other driving systems
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
: If equipped
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that assists the driver in making the
decision to change lanes.
The system uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an
adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror
(the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the out-
side rear view mirror indicator.
BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off.
Outside rear view mirror indicator
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror
indicator on that side illuminates. If the turn signal lever is operated when a
vehicle is in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.
BSM indicator
When the system is on, the indicator will come on.
287
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The blind spot that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)
from the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side
of the vehicle is not in the detection
area
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m)
from the rear bumper
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) for-
ward of the rear bumper
288
2-4. Using other driving systems
■The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when
The BSM main switch is set to on and vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph
(16 km/h)
■The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when
●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle
●Another vehicle enters the vehicles detection area when it changes lanes.
■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles
and/or objects:
●Vehicles traveling from the opposite direction
●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
●Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
●Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur
289
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor may not function correctly
●The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect vehicles correctly in the following condi-
tions:
• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
• When ice, mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detec-
tion area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the
road etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away
from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area.
• Directly after the BSM switch is set to on.
• When towing a trailer
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
●Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or
object may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall
etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following
vehicle.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your
vehicle enters the detection area
290
2-4. Using other driving systems
■The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning
message is displayed: (P. 75 4 )
●There is a malfunction with the sensors
●The sensors have become dirty
●The outside temperature is extremely high or low
●The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: OAYSRR2A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law : Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause inter-
ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands : 24.05 - 24.25GHz
Output power : less than 20 milliwatts
291
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary system which alerts the driver that a
vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. The
system cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause
an accident resulting in death or serious injury. According to conditions, the system
may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety
is necessary.
■Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear
bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can
function correctly.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and
vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or sur-
rounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the
bumper.
●Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
●Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
●Keep the sensor and its surrounding area
on the bumper clean at all times.
292
2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle precautions
Off-road vehicle feature
●Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
●An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
●It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passen-
ger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform sat-
isfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at
excessive speeds may cause rollover.
CAUTION
■Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious
injury or damage to your vehicle:
●In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle roll-
over causing death or serious injury.
●Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle
gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or
abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher
ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its
center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of
off-road applications.
293
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precau-
tions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of
areas to off-road vehicles.
●Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted
to travel.
●Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering pri-
vate property.
●Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
●Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving tech-
niques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.
CAUTION
●Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of
gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
●Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down
is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways
much more easily than forward or backward.
■Additional information for off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult
the following organizations.
●State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
●State Motor Vehicle Bureau
●Recreational Vehicle Clubs
●U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
294
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious
injury or damage to your vehicle:
●Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in
dangerous places.
●Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could
jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
●Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud, water or snow.
●After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check that there is no
grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped to the underbody.
Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.
●When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds,
jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehi-
cle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive dam-
age to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
NOTICE
■To prevent water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or
other components does not occur.
●Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
●Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality,
locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately dam-
age.
●Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature
failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reduc-
ing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
295
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the stream for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.
■Inspection after off-road driving
●Sand and mud that has accumulated around brake discs may affect braking effi-
ciency and may damage brake system components.
●Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that
has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled mainte-
nance information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.
296
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible.
●Be sure all items are secured in place.
●Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
297
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
(P. 80 6 )
Calculation formula for your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P. 8 06 )
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your
vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb.
(kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C
lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
*1: A =Weight of people
*2: B =Total load capacity
*3: C =Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg)
get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as fol-
lows:
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4: D =Additional weight of people
*5: E =Available cargo and luggage load
298
2-5. Driving information
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
●Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher than the
seatbacks.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle in the
event of sudden braking or in an accident.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the items may
get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident:
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover
• On the instrument panel
•On the dashboard
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some-
one in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
299
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in
the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause dete-
rioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
■Roof luggage carrier precautions (if equipped)
To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or
more genuine Lexus cross rails or their equivalent.
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
●Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage car-
rier.
●Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of gravity of the
vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or
abrupt maneuvers, otherwise the result may be a loss of control or vehicle roll-
over due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious
injury.
●If driving for long distances, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle
now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
●Do not exceed 165 lb. (75 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
●To reduce wind noise when there is no luggage loaded on the roof luggage car-
rier, move the front cross rail to the front-most position and the rear cross rail to
the rearmost position.
●Place the cargo so that its weight is distrib-
uted evenly between the front and rear
axles.
●If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed
the vehicle’s overall length or width.
(P. 80 6 )
Cross rails
Roof rails
300
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■When loading cargo
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.
301
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Vehicle load limits
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 693)
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, TWR
(Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.
■Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 806)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
■Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose esti-
mated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■TWR (Trailer weight rating): (P. 310, 806)
TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its
cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
■Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
302
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
■Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is fro-
zen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
●Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have
accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around
the tires or on the brakes.
●Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.
303
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size
is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
0.43 in. (10.8 mm) in width
Cross chain:
0.15 in. (3.9 mm) in diameter
1.00 in. (25.3 mm) in length
0.54 in. (13.8 mm) in width
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
■When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road
conditions.
■When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvert-
ent sliding or creeping.
304
2-5. Driving information
■Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
●Install the tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 1.0 km).
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
●Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera-
tions that cause sudden engine braking.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
305
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
306
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Towing related terms
■GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum of
the total vehicle weight (including
the occupants, cargo and any
optional equipment installed on
the vehicle) and the weight of the
trailer being towed (including the
cargo in the trailer).
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehi-
cle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance,
braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of
others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure
that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equip-
ment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ
the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer
stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch
systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accor-
dance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.
Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing
a trailer for commercial purposes.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as towing kits, etc.
307
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehicle
weight is the total weight of the
vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is
the sum of the vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
tongue weight.
■GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross axle
weight. The gross axle weight is the
load placed on each axle (front
and rear).
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
308
2-5. Driving information
■TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the cargo
in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming base
vehicle with one driver, one front
passenger, towing package (if
available), hitch and hitch systems
(if required).
Additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the vehi-
cle will reduce the trailer weight
rating so as not to exceed GCWR,
GVWR and GAWR.
If the gross trailer weight exceeds
3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recom-
mended to use a trailer with 2 or
more axles.
■Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)
The trailer weight rating for towing
a trailer without a trailer service
brake system.
(With brakes)
(Without brakes)
309
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer hitch
ball. (P. 311)
Weight limits
●The gross trailer weight must never exceed the TWR described in the
table. (P. 310)
●The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR
described in the table. (P. 310)
●The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the GVWR indi-
cated on the Certification Label.
●The gross axle weight on each
axle must never exceed the
GAWR indicated on the Certifi-
cation Label.
●If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service
brakes are required.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control
device with sufficient capacity is required.
310
2-5. Driving information
GCWR, TWR, Unbraked TWR, Fifth wheel and Gooseneck towing TWR
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the lim-
its.
■GCWR* and TWR*
■Unbraked TWR*
1000 lb. (453 kg)
*: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE Interna-
tional per SAE J2807.
Tow in g t y pe Driving system GCWR TWR
Without towing package
2WD 7560 lb.
(3429 kg) 2000 lb.
(907 kg)
AWD 7650 lb.
(3470 kg)
With towing
package
2WD 9060 lb.
(4109 kg) 3500 lb.
(1588 kg)
AWD 9150 lb.
(4150 kg)
311
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Trailer Tongue Weight
●A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of
trailers or towing as described below.
●To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be
loaded by referring to the following instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100 =
9% to 11%)
Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight
If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front axle
to the same weight as before the trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front
fender height above the front axle before connection. Adjust weight
distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the same
height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be
measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station,
building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
312
2-5. Driving information
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Lexus recom-
mends the use of Lexus hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, con-
tact your Lexus dealer.
●If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Lexus dealer.
●Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement
of your vehicle.
●Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
●Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
●Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to pre-
vent entry of any substances into the vehicle.
313
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer cou-
pler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of
the lock washer and nut by at least
2 threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diam-
eter size.
Trailer class Typical trailer ball
size
IV
2 5/16 in.
II and III
2 in.
I
1 7/8 in.
314
2-5. Driving information
Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball
Weight carrying ball position:
45.1 in. (1145 mm)
Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness stored in the
rear end under body.
315
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■Auto current cut-off function
In case of over current, the auto cut-off function stops the power flowing to the
trailer lights to prevent damage to the vehicle’s electrical system.
This function is activated when the rated current of any of the following trailer light
circuit components is exceeded:
●Tail lights: maximum 7.8 A
●Stop/turn signal light (right): maximum 4.5 A
●Stop/turn signal light (left): maximum 4.5 A
■When the auto current cut function is activated
If a trailer light does not come on due to the activation of the auto current cut func-
tion, the light system will need to be reset.
Follow the reset procedure shown below.
●If a tail light does not come on, turn off the headlight switch.
●If the right-side stop/turn signal light does not come on, put the turn signal in the
off position or remove foot from the brake pedal.
●If the left-side stop/turn signal light does not come on, put the turn signal in the
off position or remove foot from the brake pedal.
If the emergency flashers do not operate, press the emergency flasher switch to
turn them off.
After the light system is reset, operate the light switches again to see if the lights
operate normally.
If the lights do not operate normally, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
316
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an
accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:
●Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not
exceed the posted towing speed limit.
●Lexus recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104
km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted
towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your
trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing
vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases.
Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
●Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
●Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an
area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination.
●Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to
move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the
trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a
trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone
guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
●As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
●Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknif-
ing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slip-
pery surfaces.
●Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
317
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
●Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a
turn.
●Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a
wider than normal turning radius.
●Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery sur-
faces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
●Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your
trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
●To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system perfor-
mance when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in D.
●Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long
downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill
grades.
●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes
too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
●Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a
long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull
your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. (P. 799)
318
2-5. Driving information
●Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so
only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and
trailer’s wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into P and turn off the engine.
●When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
319
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height
■Before towing
Check that the following conditions are met:
●Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 815)
●Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-
tion.
●All trailer lights work as required by law.
●All lights work each time you connect them.
●The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
●The trailer is level when it is hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight,
overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
●The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
●The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local
regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing pur-
poses.
No matter which class of tow hitch applies,
for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball
setup must be the proper height for the cou-
pler on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
320
2-5. Driving information
■Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as
an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Lexus recommends that you
do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start tow-
ing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less
than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.
■Maintenance
●If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to
the additional load. (See “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner's Manual
Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
●Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately
600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
■If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely
affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
●If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and
trailer should stabilize.
●After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is
beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing
vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
321
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Trailer towing precautions
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the
trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking perfor-
mance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch.
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.
■To avoid accident or injury
●Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with
sufficient capacity is required.
●Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as
close to the trailer axle as possible.
●Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed
limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest.
Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery
surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instabil-
ity from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehi-
cle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability.
●Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
●Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and
loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
●Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
●Do not use cruise control when towing.
●Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do
not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
●Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descend-
ing steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden
downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the
brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could
cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
●Do not tow a trailer when the compact spare tire is installed on your vehicle.
322
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch
manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a
higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the par-
ticular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for
the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch man-
ufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.
■When towing a trailer
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.
●If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required.
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.
●Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s brak-
ing effectiveness.
●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the
trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is
danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
NOTICE
■When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the trailer
hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your
vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.
323
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Dinghy towing
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and Active Torque Con-
trol 4WD system (AWD models)
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on
the ground.
2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from
the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the trans-
mission.
AWD models: Never tow this vehicle with
any of the wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to the transmission
and Active Torque Control 4WD system.
324
2-5. Driving information
Interior features 3
325
3-1. Lexus Display Audio
system
Lexus Display Audio
system..................................... 328
Display settings ...................... 332
Setup menu ............................. 334
Vehicle information............... 340
Mobile Assistant.................... 343
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system (with the Lexus
Display Audio system)....... 345
Automatic air conditioning
system (without a
navigation system or the
Lexus Display Audio
system) ................................... 353
Rear window defogger
switch....................................... 361
Windshield wiper de-icer.... 363
326
3-3. Using the Lexus Display
Audio system
Audio system (with the
Lexus Display Audio
system).................................... 365
Using the radio....................... 368
Using the CD player ............ 383
Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA discs.............. 384
Listening to an iPod................ 394
Listening to a USB
memory ................................. 402
Using the AUX port ............... 412
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio......................................... 414
Optimal use of the audio
system..................................... 428
Using the steering wheel
audio switches..................... 430
Hands-free system
(for mobile phone)............... 433
Using the Bluetooth®
phone ....................................... 441
Setting the hands-free
system..................................... 459
Bluetooth® settings .............. 472
3-4. Using the audio system
Audio system (without a
navigation system or the
Lexus Display Audio
system) ................................... 480
Using the radio ....................... 483
Using the CD player............. 492
Playing MP3 and WMA
discs.......................................... 501
Operating an iPod.................. 510
Operating a USB
memory.................................. 520
Bluetooth® audio system.... 530
Using the Bluetooth®
audio system......................... 535
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player ... 540
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player ... 544
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ........................................ 551
Optimal use of the audio
system..................................... 552
Using the AUX port.............. 554
Using the steering wheel
audio switches...................... 556
Hands-free system for
mobile phones...................... 560
Interior features 3
327
Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phones)............. 565
Making a phone call .............. 573
Setting a mobile phone......... 578
Security and system
setup....................................... 584
Using the phone book.......... 588
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list..................... 595
• Interior lights ........................ 596
• Personal lights...................... 596
3-6. Using the storage
features
List of storage features......... 598
• Glove box .............................. 599
• Bottle holders/
door pockets........................ 600
• Cup holders ........................... 601
• Console box.......................... 604
• Coin holder ........................... 606
• Auxiliary boxes .................... 606
• Under tray ............................ 608
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors ................................. 609
Vanity mirrors .......................... 610
Clock............................................ 611
Outside temperature
display...................................... 613
Multi-display light control..... 615
Power outlets ............................ 616
Heated steering wheel .......... 619
Seat heaters and
ventilators ............................. 620
Armrest .................................... 622
Coat hooks .............................. 623
Assist grips................................ 624
Floor mat .................................. 625
Luggage compartment
features................................... 627
Garage door opener ............ 632
Compass .................................. 638
Safety Connect ...................... 642
328
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Lexus Display Audio system
By using the Lexus Display Audio controller, you can control the audio sys-
tem and hands-free system, etc.
■Lexus Display Audio controller
Displaying the audio control
screen (P. 365)
Displaying the “Menu”
screen (P. 329)
Displaying the previous
screen
Turn or move the controller to
select a function, number and
screen button.
Push the controller to enter
the selected function, num-
ber and screen button.
: If equipped
329
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■“Menu” screen
To display the “Menu” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller.
Button Function
“Climate” Automatic air conditioning system
(P. 345 )
“Phone” Hands-free system (P. 433 )
“Car” Vehicle information (P. 3 40)
“Setup” Setup menu (P. 33 4 )
“Display” Display settings (P. 332)
330
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Lexus Display Audio system operation
■Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
Select: Turn or move the con-
troller.
Enter: Push the controller.
■Basic screen operation
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate button to scroll through the
list.
: This indicator will turn on
when the list box is selected.
: To scroll to the next or
previous page.
: To return to the previous
screen.
331
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■When using the screen
●Under extremely cold conditions, the Lexus Display Audio controller may react
slowly.
●If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be
operating slightly slower than normal.
●The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.
Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display Settings”
screen (P. 332) or remove your sunglasses.
CAUTION
■Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
●Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Lexus Display
Audio controller as this may cause an injury.
●Be careful when touching the Lexus Display Audio controller in extreme temper-
atures as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehi-
cle.
NOTICE
■To prevent the Lexus Display Audio controller malfunction
●Do not allow the Lexus Display Audio controller to come into contact with food,
liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a
strange odor or stop functioning.
●Do not subject the Lexus Display Audio controller to excessive pressure or
strong impact as the controller may bend or break off.
●Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the
Lexus Display Audio controller as this may cause it to stop functioning.
●Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Lexus Display Audio con-
troller.
●If your hand or any object is on the Lexus Display Audio controller when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode, the Lexus
Display Audio controller may not operate properly.
332
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Display settings
Changing between day mode and night mode
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day
Mode”.
If the screen is set in day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condi-
tion is memorized even with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
off.
You can adjust the contrast and brightness of the screen and also turn the
display off.
To display the “Display Settings” screen, press the “MENU” button on the
Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Display” on the “Menu”
screen.
Turn off screen
The screen is turned off. To turn
it on, press the “AUDIO” or
“MENU” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller.
Changes to day mode.
(P. 332 )
Adjust screen contrast/
brightness (P. 333)
Adjust screen contrast/
brightness of rear view moni-
tor camera (P. 333)
333
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness
Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display Settings” screen.
Adjust the display as desired using
“+” or “-”.
Select “Contrast” or “Brightness”
using the “<<” or “>>”.
Select “OK”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
“-” “+”
“Contrast” Weaker Stronger
“Brightness” Darker Brighter
STEP 3
334
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Setup menu
You can change the Lexus Display Audio system to your desired setting.
To display the “Setup” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Dis-
play Audio controller and then select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
Button Page
“General” P. 335
“Voice” P. 339
“Bluetooth*”P. 472
“Phone” P. 459
“A u d i o ” P. 338
“Vehicle” P. 337
335
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
General settings
This screen is used for various settings.
Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 33 4 )
Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
Select language (P. 335)
Beep on/off
Select button color
Animation on/off
The animation effect for audio
source selection screen, screen
transitions, etc. can be set to “On”
or “Off”.
Personal data can be deleted.
(P. 336)
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
■Selecting a language
Select “Language” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select the desired language.
The selectable languages may dif-
fer depending on the model or
region.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
336
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
■Delete personal data
Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once
deleted.
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.
The following personal data can be deleted or turned to their default set-
tings.
•Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
•Bluetooth
devices data
• Phone sound settings
• Detailed Bluetooth settings
• Sound settings
• Preset switch data
• Last used radio station
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
337
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Vehicle settings
This screen is used for various vehicle settings.
Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 33 4 )
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Vehicle customization settings
(P. 337)
Intuitive parking assist settings
(P. 252)
■Vehicle customization settings
Various setting can be changed.
Select “Vehicle Customization” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
(P. 83 4 )
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
: If equipped
STEP 1
STEP 2
338
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Audio settings
This screen is used for various audio settings.
Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 33 4 )
Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
HD Radio™ technology set-
tings (P. 374 )
iPod setting (P. 33 8 )
■iPod setting
This screen is used for iPod setting.
Select “iPod Settings” on the “Audio Settings” screen. (P. 33 8 )
Select “Display Cover Art”.
“On” or “Off” can be selected to
display captured image/iPod cover
art in the screen.
When you complete settings, select “OK”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
339
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Voice settings
This screen is used for guidance for Bluetooth® hands-free systems set-
ting.
Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 33 4 )
Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
Voice guidance volume setting
Voice recognition prompts on/
off
Restore default settings
When you complete settings, select “OK”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
340
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Vehicle information
This screen can be used to display the fuel consumption.
To display the “Trip Information” or “History” screen, press the “MENU”
button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Car” on the
“Menu” screen.
341
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Fuel consumption
■Trip information
If the “Trip Information” screen does not appear, select “Trip
Information”.
Average vehicle speed
Elapsed time
Cruising range
Previous fuel consumption per
minute
Current fuel consumption
Reset the trip information data
“History” screen appears
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
■History
If the “History” screen does not appear, select “History”.
Previous fuel economy record
Current fuel economy
Best recorded fuel economy
Update the past record data
Reset the past record data
“Trip Information” screen
appears
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
342
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
■Updating the past record data
Selecting “Update” on the “History” screen will update the past record data.
Also, the average fuel consumption displayed in the multi-information display will
be reset at the same time.
343
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Mobile Assistant
The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri Eyes Free mode via
the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible
cellular phone must be registered and connected to this system via
Bluetooth. (P. 4 41)
Press and hold the off hook
switch until you hear the beeps
that indicate the system is listen-
ing.
The Mobile Assistant can be
used only when the neighboring
screen is displayed.
To cancel the Mobile Assistant,
select “Cancel”, or press and
hold the off hook switch.
To restart the Mobile Assistant
for additional commands, press
the off hook switch. Mobile
Assistant can only be restarted
after the system responds to a
voice command. After some
phone and music commands,
the Mobile Assistant feature will
automatically end to complete
the requested action.
STEP 1
STEP 2
344
3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
■Adjusting the volume
The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the “PWR·VOL” knob or
steering wheel volume switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are
synchronized.
■Microphone
●Wait for the listening beeps before using the Mobile Assistant.
●The Mobile Assistant may not recognize commands in the following situations:
• When spoken too quickly.
• When spoken at a low or high volume.
• When the roof or windows are open.
• When passengers are talking while the Mobile Assistant is being used.
• When the air conditioning system’s fan speed is set high.
• When the air conditioning vents are turned toward the microphone.
■Mobile Assistant precautions
●The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version
installed on the connected device.
●Some Siri features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an
unavailable function, Siri will inform you that the function is not available.
●If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth, an error
message will be displayed on the screen.
●While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used.
●If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio
source is Bluetooth audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction
prompts.
It is not necessary to speak directly into the
microphone when using the Mobile Assis-
tant.
345
3
Interior features
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system (with the Lexus Display Audio system)
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tem-
perature setting.
To display the air conditioning operation screen, press the “MENU” button
on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Climate”.
■Control panel
Air conditioning operation screen
Outside temperature display
Windshield
defogger
button
Air outlet
selector
button
Outside/
recircu-
lated air
mode but-
ton
Passenger's side temperature
control buttons
“OFF” button
Automatic
mode button
Fan speed
control button
Driver's side temperature
control buttons
346
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Press .
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature
setting.
Press or select of the “TEMP” to increase the tempera-
ture and or to decrease the temperature.
When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the pas-
senger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature
for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
■Automatic mode indicator
If fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other
than that operated are maintained.
■Automatic air conditioning system control screen
Adjusting driver’s side tem-
perature setting
Adjusting passenger’s side
temperature setting
Adjusting the fan speed
Selecting air outlet mode
Cooling and dehumidifica-
tion function on/off
Dual mode on/off
Windshield wiper de-icer on/
off
STEP 1
STEP 2
347
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the settings manually
■Basic setting
To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan speed,
press on to increase the fan speed and to
decrease the fan speed or select “” of to increase the
fan speed and “” to decrease the fan speed.
Press to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature setting, press or select of the
“TEMP” to increase the temperature and or to
decrease the temperature.
When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the pas-
senger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature
for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
To change the air outlets, press
or select an air outlet
switch on the operation screen.
The air outlets used are switched
each time is pressed. The
air flow shown on the display indi-
cates the following:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
348
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the wind-
shield defogger operates.
349
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between (recirculated air mode) and
(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system oper-
ates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return to
recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
350
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
351
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Air conditioning system settings
●When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned on, the air conditioning
system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was turned off.
●Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic
key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used.
●This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer.
■Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and ambi-
ent conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
Immediately after the button is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
■Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an extended
period.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in accor-
dance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning
system is on
●In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning
system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce
fuel consumption.
●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing .
■Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations
where the windows need to be defogged.
352
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■When outside air temperature is below 32F (0C)
The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when is
on.
■Ventilation and air conditioning odors
●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The dif-
ference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.
353
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Automatic air conditioning system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system)
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tem-
perature setting.
Automatic
mode
button
Driver’s side temperature
display
Air outlet selector button
Fan speed
control
button
Air outlet display Fan speed display
Passenger’s side temperature
display
Driver's side temperature
control buttons
Cooling and dehumidification function
on/off button
Outside/recirculated air mode button
Windshield defogger
button
Passenger’s side temperature control buttons
Dual mode
button
“OFF”
button
354
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Press .
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature
setting.
Press on to increase the temperature and to
decrease the temperature.
When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the passen-
ger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
■Automatic mode indicator
If fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other
than that operated are maintained.
STEP 1
STEP 2
355
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the settings manually
■Basic setting
To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan speed,
press on to increase the fan speed and to
decrease the fan speed.
To turn the fan off, press .
To adjust the temperature setting, press on to increase
the temperature and to decrease the temperature.
When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the passen-
ger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
To change the air outlets, press .
The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed. The
air flow shown on the display indicates the following:
Air flows to the upper body.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
356
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the wind-
shield defogger operates.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between (recirculated air mode) and (out-
side air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.
357
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system oper-
ates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return to
recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
358
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
■Air conditioning system settings
●When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned on, the air conditioning
system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was turned off.
●Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic
key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used.
●This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer.
■Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and ambi-
ent conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
Immediately after the button is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
■Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an extended
period.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in accor-
dance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
359
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning
system is on
●In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning
system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce
fuel consumption.
●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing .
■Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations
where the windows need to be defogged.
■When outside air temperature is below 32F (0C)
The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when is
pressed.
■When the indicator light on goes off
Press to turn on the cooling and dehumidification function again. There may
be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light goes off again
shortly after the button is pressed. Have it inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■Ventilation and air conditioning odors
●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
360
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-
ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.
361
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Rear window defogger switch
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops,
dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system
Turns the rear window and out-
side rear view mirror defoggers
on/off
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient tem-
perature and vehicle speed.
Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio
system
Turns the rear window and out-
side rear view mirror defoggers
on/off
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient tem-
perature and vehicle speed.
362
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Operating conditions
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■The outside rear view mirror defoggers
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defog-
gers on.
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very
hot and burn you.
363
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Windshield wiper de-icer
: If equipped
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system
Display the air conditioning operation screen. (P. 345)
Select to the wind-
shield wiper de-icer on/off
The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio
system
Turns the windshield wiper de-
icer on/off
The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
STEP 1
STEP 2
364
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Operating conditions
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the lower part of the windshield or the side of the front pillars, as the
surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
365
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Audio system (with the Lexus Display Audio system)
To display the audio control screen, press the “MEDIA” button, “RADIO”
button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
Title Page
Using the radio P. 36 8
Using the CD player P. 38 3
Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs P. 384
Listening to an iPod P. 394
Listening to a USB memory P. 40 2
Using the AUX port P. 41 2
Listening to Bluetooth® audio P. 41 4
Optimal use of the audio system P. 428
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 430
366
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Switching the audio source
Press the “MEDIA” button, “RADIO” button or the “AUDIO” but-
ton on the Lexus Display Audio controller to display the audio
control screen.
Select “Source” or press the
“AUDIO” button on the Lexus Dis-
play Audio controller to display the
audio source selection screen.
Each time the “MEDIA” button is
pressed, an audio source other
than radio is changed to.
Each time the “RADIO” button is
pressed, radio mode is changed.
Select the desired audio source.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
367
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Using mobile phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a mobile phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■Certification
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.
368
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Using the radio
Press the “RADIO” button or “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio
controller and then select “AM”, “FM” or “SAT”.
■Control panel
Audio control screen
Mute button
Frequency adjust-
ment knob
Seek/preset station
selector button
AM/FM/SAT mode buttons
“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume
369
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Audio control screen
Pressing the “RADIO” button or “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Dis-
play Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
“Presets” screen
“Options” screen
“Options” screen appears
Audio source selection
screen appears
Changing the Multicast Ch
Information in the music
under broadcasting is mem-
orized
Selecting HD Radio™ tech-
nology
Setting the sound
(P. 428 )
Displaying text messages
Scanning for receivable sta-
tion
Preset stations
“Presets” screen appears
Selecting program type or
channel category
RBDS message display on/
off
Displaying traffic messages
370
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Selecting a station
■Seek tuning
Press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.
■Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob.
■Preset stations
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or select desired preset
stations.
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Radio mode has a mix preset function, which can store up to 36 stations
(6 station per page 6 page) from any of the AM, FM or SAT bands.
Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL”
knob or pressing and holding “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button.
Select and hold one of the preset stations (1-6 every page).
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen. The radio will find the next station and
stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds
if “Analog” is selected (P. 374), and then scan again.
Select “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
371
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information. RBDS features are available only when listen-
ing to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM Info”
indicator is on.
■Selecting a desired type
Select “Options”.
Select “FM Info” to turn the indica-
tor on.
STEP 1
STEP 2
372
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Select “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to select program types.
The type of program changes each time the button is selected.
• Classical
•Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
•Jazz
•News
• Oldies
•Other
•Pop Music
• Religion
•Rock
•R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
•Sports
•Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio Settings” are set to analog)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.
Select “TYPE SEEK”.
The radio seeks or scans for sta-
tions by the relevant program type.
If no relevant program can be
found, “no type” will appear on the
screen.
STEP 3
STEP 4
373
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Traffic announcement
Select “Traffic” on the “Options”
screen.
“TRAF SEEK” appears on the
screen, and the radio will start
seeking any station broadcasting
traffic program information.
If no traffic program station is
found, “No Traffic” appears on the
screen.
HD Radio™ technology information
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your radio
product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives. Digital broadcasts
have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free,
crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to
available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-
tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos
are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
374
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■HD Radio™ technology settings
Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 33 4 )
Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “HD Radio Settings”.
Select “HD Radio/Analog Set-
tings”.
Receiving both analog and digi-
tal broadcasts
Receiving only digital broad-
casts
Receiving only analog broad-
casts
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
■Using HD Radio™ technology
Select “HD Radio” portion to turn
the indicator on.
The radio receiver will automati-
cally tune from an analog signal to
a digital signal within 5 seconds.
An orange “HD)” logo indicator
will be displayed when in digital.
Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL”
knob or pressing and holding “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
375
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Selecting a desired type
Select “Options”.
Select “TYPE ” or “TYPE” to select program types.
The type of program changes each time the button is selected.
(P. 37 1 )
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.
Select “TYPE SEEK”.
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
If no relevant program can be found, “no type” will appear on the
screen.
■Displaying text information
Information such as the artist name, song title, album title and music
genre being listened to are displayed on the text screen.
Select “Text”.
Select “Additional Information” to
display messages from the station.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
376
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Changing the multiple or supplemental programs
On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have multiple or sup-
plemental programs on one FM station.
Select “Multicast”.
Each time “Multicast” is selected,
the supplemental program
changes.
If “Multicast” is selected when
tuned to the last of the supplemen-
tal programs, the main program
will be returned to.
■Preserving tag information
Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system
and transmits to an iPod.
Select “Tag” to bookmark the
music information.
Connect iPod using an iPod cable.
(P. 394)
The music tag moves from the system into the iPod.
If tagging the music information fails, error message will be displayed
on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the
songs which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed.
Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album.
STEP 1
STEP 2
377
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■HD Radio™ technology troubleshooting guide
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time
alignment- a user
may hear a short
period of program-
ming replayed or an
echo, stutter or skip.
The radio stations
analog and digital
volume is not prop-
erly aligned or the
station is in ball-
game mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. A
user can contact the radio sta-
tion.
Sound fades, blend-
ing in and out.
Radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up
as the vehicle continues to be
driven. Selecting “Analog” can
force radio in an analog audio.
Audio mute condi-
tion when an HD2/
HD3 multicast
channel had been
playing.
The radio does not
have access to digi-
tal signals at the
moment.
This is normal behavior, wait
until the digital signal returns. If
out of the coverage area, seek
a new station.
Audio mute delay
when selecting an
HD2/HD3 multi-
cast channel preset.
The digital multicast
content is not avail-
able until HD
Radio™ broadcast
can be decoded
and make the audio
available. This takes
up to 7 seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait
for the audio to become avail-
able.
Text information
does not match the
present song audio.
Data service issue
by the radio broad-
caster.
Broadcaster should be noti-
fied. Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experie
nces.
378
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
XM® Satellite Radio
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press the “RADIO” button or select “SAT” on the audio source
selection.
Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired channel in
the all categories or press and hold “” or “” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired channel in the cur-
rent category.
■Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Select and hold one of the preset stations
(1-6 every page).
No text information
shown for the
present selected
frequency.
Data service issue
by the radio broad-
caster.
Broadcaster should be noti-
fied. Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experie
nces.
Experience Cause Action
STEP 1
STEP 2
379
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Changing the channel category
Select “Options”.
Select “TYPE ” or “TYPE”.
■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
Scanning channels in the current category
Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
Select “SCAN” once again when the desired channel is
reached.
■Displaying the title and artist name
Select “Text”.
The screen will show up to 64
characters.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
380
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
●Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may
adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.
●It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains and transmitters.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear spoiler and the rear window. To
maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other
metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts pro-
vided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.
Visit on the web at www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select “CH000” using the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob, and the receiver's 8-
character ID number will appear.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompany-
ing Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
381
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
Message Explanation
SAT Check
Antenna
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the
XM antenna cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surround-
ing antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer for
assistance.
SAT Ch Unautho-
rized
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The
radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact XM Satellite Radio for subscription informa-
tion. When a contract is canceled, you can choose
“CH 000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. To listen to the
premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
SAT No Signal
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait
until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger
signal.
Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
SAT Channel Off
Air
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any pro-
gramming. Select another channel.
382
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-
438-9677 (Canada).
■Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisee sous reserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage prejudiciable.
Message Explanation
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action is
required.
SAT Chan
Unavailable
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previ-
ous channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change auto-
matically, select another channel.
383
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Using the CD player
Loading a disc
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
Ejecting a disc
Press and remove the disc.
Audio control screen
Playback/
Pause button
Track/file selector
knob
Track/file selector button
Audio source selector button
“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume
Eject button
384
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
Insert a disc or press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the
Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “CD” with a disc inserted.
■Audio control screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Dis-
play Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
Audio CD
MP3/WMA disc
Audio source selection
screen appears
Displaying the track/file list
Select: Playing the previous
track/file
Select and hold: Reversing a
track/file
Pause
Select to play
Select: Playing the next
track/file
Select and hold: Fast-for-
warding a track/file
Repeat play
Random playback
Setting the sound
(P. 428 )
Displaying the folder list
385
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks (Audio CD)
■Selecting a track
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.
■Selecting a track from audio control screen
Select or .
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold or until you hear a
beep.
■Selecting a track from the track list
Select “Tracks” on the screen.
Select the desired track number.
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing files (MP3/WMA disc)
■Selecting a file
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired file number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.
■Selecting a file from audio control screen
Select or .
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold or until you hear a
beep.
STEP 1
STEP 2
386
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Selecting a file from the file list
Select “Files” on the screen.
Select the desired file number.
Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA disc)
Select “Folders” on the screen.
Select the desired folder number.
Select the desired file number.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
387
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Random playback
Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
Audio CD
MP3/WMA disc
Repeat play
Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
Audio CD
MP3/WMA disc
: Random play on the disc
: Off
: Random play on the folder
: Random play in all the folders
: Off
: Track repeat
: Off
: File repeat
: Folder repeat
: Off
388
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Displaying the title and artist name
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.
■Error messages
If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■If disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.
Message Cause Correction procedures
Check DISC
• The disc is dirty or
damaged.
• The disc is inserted
upside down.
• The disc is not playable
with the player.
• Clean the disc.
• Insert the disc cor-
rectly.
• Confirm the disc is
playable with the
player.
DISC Error There is a malfunction
within the system. Eject the disc.
No music files found.
This indicates that no
playable data is included
in the disc.
Eject the disc.
389
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32—320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8—160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48—192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48—320 (kbps)
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
390
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed
correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
391
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depend-
ing on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be pos-
sible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
392
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD load/eject function.
●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
●Low-quality and deformed CDs
●CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off
393
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
394
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller and then select “iPod” with an iPod connected.
■Connecting an iPod
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it
is not turned on.
STEP 1
STEP 2
395
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Control panel
Audio control screen
Playback/
Pause button
Song selector knob
Song selector button
Audio source selector button
“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume
396
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Audio control screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Dis-
play Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection
screen appears
Selecting the play mode
Displaying the song list
Select: Playing the previous
song
Select and hold: Reversing a
song
Pause
Select to playback
Select: Playing the next song
Select and hold: Fast-for-
warding a song
Repeat play
Shuffle play
Setting the sound (P. 428 )
397
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a play mode
Select “Browse” on the screen.
Select the desired play mode by
selecting the “Playlists”, “Artists”,
“Albums”, “Songs”, “Podcasts”,
“Audio books”, “Genres” or “Com-
posers” tabs.
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing songs
■Selecting one song at a time
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired song.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.
■Selecting a song from audio control screen
Select or .
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold or until you hear a
beep.
■Selecting a song from the list
Select “Songs” on the screen.
Select the desired song.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
398
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Shuffle play
Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
When a large number of songs is stored in an iPod, shuffle selection may take
time.
Repeat play
Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: Playing the songs in shuffle
: Playing the albums in the iPod in shuffle
: Off
: Repeating the song
: Off
399
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■About iPod
●“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
●iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■iPod cover art
●Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.
●This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P. 33 8 )
●It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated
while the cover art display is in process.
●Only iPod cover art that is saved in a JPEG format can be displayed.
■iPod functions
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the
iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may
not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to
a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve the problem.
●While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own con-
trols. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system instead.
●When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so,
charge the iPod before use.
●Supported models (P. 400)
400
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your
iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
■Error messages
“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to
connect the iPod.”:
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“There are no songs available for playback. Please load compatible media to your
iPod.”:
This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
■Compatible models
The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices
can be used with this system.
●Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
•iPod classic
•iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
•iPhone 4
•iPhone 3GS
•iPhone 3G
•iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
401
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■If the armrest cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the
armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may
damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.
■To prevent damage to iPod
●Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-
nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter-
minal.
402
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Listening to a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller and then select “USB” with a USB memory connected.
■Connecting a USB memory
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
STEP 1
STEP 2
403
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Control panel
Audio control screen
Playback/
Pause button
File selector knob
File selector button
Audio source selector button
“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume
404
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Audio control screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Dis-
play Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection
screen appears
Displaying the folder list
Displaying the file list
Select: Playing the previous
file
Select and hold: Reversing a
file
Pause
Select to playback
Select: Playing the next file
Select and hold: Fast-for-
warding a file
Repeat play
Random playback
Setting the sound (P. 428 )
405
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing files
■Selecting one file at time
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired file.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.
■Selecting a file from audio control screen
Select or .
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold or until you hear a
beep.
■Selecting a file from the list
Select “Files” on the screen.
Select the desired file number.
STEP 1
STEP 2
406
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Selecting a folder
Select “Folders” on the screen.
Select the desired folder number.
Select the desired file number.
Random playback
Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
: Random play on the folder
: Random play in all the folders
: Off
407
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Repeat play
Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
■USB memory functions
●Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device
itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the
device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting
it once again may resolve the problem.
●If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and
reconnected, format the memory.
■Error messages for USB memory
“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to
connect the USB device.”:
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connec-
tion.
“No compatible audio files found. Please add compatible files to your USB device.”:
This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the
USB memory.
: File repeat
: Folder repeat
: Off
408
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■USB memory
●Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 HS (480Mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed
correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This
format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
409
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
410
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
●MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder.
If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it
was last used.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be skipped (not played).
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memories or operate the controls.
411
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■If the armrest cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the sys-
tem, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as
this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc.
■To prevent damage to USB memories
●Do not leave USB memories in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it
is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory
or its terminal.
412
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Using the AUX port
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjust-
ments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller and then select “AUX”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
AUX port
STEP 3
413
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■If the armrest cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to
the system, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the
armrest as this may damage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc.
■To prevent damage to portable audio device
●Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio
device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its
terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio
device or its terminal.
414
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Listening to Bluetooth® audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy music played on a por-
table player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communication. This
audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of play-
ing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not
support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller and then select “Bluetooth*”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■Control panel
Audio control screen
Playback/
Pause button
Track selector knob
Track selector button
Audio source selector button
“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume
415
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Audio control screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Dis-
play Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection
screen appears
Displaying the list
Connecting a Bluetooth®
audio player
Displaying the track list
Select: Playing the previous
track
Select and hold: Reversing a
track
Playback
Pause
Select: Playing the next track
Select and hold: Fast-for-
warding a track
Repeat play
Random playback
Setting the sound (P. 428 )
Some titles and controls may
not be displayed depending on
the type of portable audio
player.
416
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Status display
You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on
the screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Indicators Conditions
Connection status Good Not connected
Battery charge Full Empty
417
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Registering a Bluetooth® audio player
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, you need to register your portable
audio player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your music
on the vehicle’s audio system.
You can register up to 5 devices in the system.
Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
Select “Connect”.
Select “Yes”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
418
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your portable
audio player.
For the operation of the portable
audio player, see the manual that
comes with your portable audio
player.
Passcodes are not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compati-
ble Bluetooth® devices. Depend-
ing on the device, you may need to
select “Yes” to register, or “No” to
cancel on your Bluetooth® device.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is dis-
played, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
STEP 4
419
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting the Bluetooth® audio player
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one
device at a time.
Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
Select “Connect”.
Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering a
Bluetooth® device. (P. 473 )
The selection indicator is displayed
on left side of the selected device
name.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connected the device.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
420
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Connecting the Bluetooth® audio player
There are two connection methods available.
■When the connection method is set to “From Vehicle”
When the portable audio player is on standby for the connection, it will
be automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■When the connection method is set to “From Audio Player”
Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth® audio
system.
Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
Select “Connect”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
Select the device to connect.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
421
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
■Selecting a track
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.
■Selecting a track from audio control screen
Select or .
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold or until you hear a
beep.
■Selecting a track from the list
From “Tracks”
Select “Tracks” on the screen.
Select the desired track.
STEP 1
STEP 2
422
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
From “Browse”
Select “Browse” on the screen.
Select the desired item.
Continue to select the applicable
screen button until its track list is
displayed.
Select the desired track.
Random playback
Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
: Random play on the album
: Random play in all the album
: Off
423
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Repeat play
Each time is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
■When using the Bluetooth® audio system
●In the following conditions, the system may not function.
• If the portable audio player is turned off
• If the portable audio player is not connected
• If the portable audio player’s battery is low
• If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
• If metal is covering or touching the portable player
●There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth®
audio play.
●Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system,
operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display. If the portable audio player is behind the seat or
in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, connec-
tion status may deteriorate.
■Battery charge/signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player, and this sys-
tem does not have a charging function.
: Track repeat
: Album repeat
: Off
424
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■About Bluetooth®
■Compatible models
Portable audio players must correspond to the specifications.
●Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)
●Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sounds to the head-
phone.
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
This is a profile to remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of
portable audio player.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
425
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: AJDK046
IC ID: 775E-K046
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-
tion est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
■Reconnecting the portable audio player
If the portable audio player is disconnected with a poor reception when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the
system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.
If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions
below to reconnect:
●Select the portable audio player again
●Enter the portable audio player
■When you release your car
Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 336 )
426
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it
is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20
cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énon-
cées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélec-
triques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités
: mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna
type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated
power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente
(p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communica-
tion satisfaisante.
427
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable car-
diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between them-
selves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other
than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pace-
makers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufac-
turer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
428
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Select on the audio con-
trol screen to adjust the sound
settings.
“Sound” tab
Select “-” or “+” to adjust
the treble, mid or bass to
a level between -5 to 5.
Select “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear audio
balance to a level between
Front 7 and Rear 7.
Select “L” or “R” to adjust
the left/right audio balance
to a level between L7 and
R7.
“DSP” tab
Surround on/off
Automatic sound levelizer
(ASL) on/off
429
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately.
■About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle
speed.
430
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Turning the audio system on
To turn the audio system on, press the “MODE” switch.
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Press: Turns the power on,
selects audio source
Press and hold: Pause or
mute
Increases/decreases
volume
Radio mode:
Selects radio stations
CD mode:
Selects tracks/files and
folders (MP3/WMA)
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode:
Selects files and folders
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects tracks and albums
431
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Changing the audio source
Press the “MODE” switch when the audio system is turned on. The audio
source changes as follows each time the “MODE” switch is pressed. If no
discs are inserted in the player, or if the external device is not connected,
that mode will be skipped.
FMSATCD playeriPod or USB memory
Bluetooth® audioAUXAMFM
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the volume.
Hold the button in that position to continue increasing or decreasing the vol-
ume.
Silencing a sound
Press and hold the “MODE” switch.
To cancel, press and hold the “MODE” switch.
Selecting a radio station
Press the “MODE” switch to select the radio mode.
Press “” or “” on to select a radio station.
To seek stations, press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a
beep.
STEP 1
STEP 2
432
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Selecting a track/file or song
Press the “MODE” switch to select the CD, Bluetooth® audio,
iPod or USB memory mode.
Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or song.
Selecting a folder or album
Press the “MODE” switch to select the CD (only when MP3/
WMA disc is in use), Bluetooth® audio or USB memory mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
433
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Hands-free system (for mobile phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that
allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and
make/receive calls.
■Telephone switch
Volume switch
During an incoming call:
Adjusts the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call:
Adjusts the receiver volume
The voice guidance volume can-
not be adjusted using this but-
ton.
Off hook switch
• Sending
• Receiving
• “Phone” screen display
On hook switch
• End call
• Refuse call
Talk switch
Press: Turns the voice com-
mand system on
Press and hold: Turns the
voice command system off
435
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Status display
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Phone” screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
Indicators Conditions
Connection status Good Not connected
Battery charge Full Empty
Call area “Rm”: Roaming area
Signal strength Excellent Poor
436
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■When using the hands-free system
●The audio system is muted when making a call.
●If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
●If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may
deteriorate and connecting condition may go down.
●In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a window is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• There is an effect from the network of the mobile phone
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the mobile phone is turned off
●If you are outside service range
●If the mobile phone is not connected
●If the mobile phone’s battery is low
●When outgoing is controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.
●When the mobile phone itself cannot be used
●When transferring the phonebook data from the mobile phone
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the
console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may dete-
riorate.
437
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Battery charge/Signal status
●This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.
●This system does not have a charging function.
●The Bluetooth® phone battery will burn quickly when it is connected to
Bluetooth®.
●When the mobile phone is not connected, “No Connect” is displayed.
●When you are out of service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No
service” is displayed.
■When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time
The following problems may occur.
●The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
●Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback.
■About the phonebook in this system
The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
●Phonebook data
●Call history date
●Speed dial
When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
■When you release your car
Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 336 )
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
438
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Compatible models
This system supports the following service.
●Bluetooth® Specification:
Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or higher)
●Profiles:
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or
higher)
This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using the mobile phone or
head sets. It has an outgoing and incoming call function.
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher
This is a profile to exchange phonebook data. When the Bluetooth® phone
has PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
This is a profile to transfer phonebook data.
If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone. You need to take OPP or PBAP service individually.
■Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK046
IC ID: 775E-K046
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-
tion est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
439
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it
is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20
cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énon-
cées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélec-
triques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités
: mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna
type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated
power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente
(p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communica-
tion satisfaisante.
440
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable car-
diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between them-
selves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other
than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pace-
makers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufac-
turer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to mobile phones
Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the phone.
441
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Using the Bluetooth® phone
Device name
Bluetooth® connection status (P. 435)
Dialing from history (P. 450)
Speed dialing (P. 450)
Dialing from the phonebook (P. 448)
Dialing by inputting a number (P. 447 )
Connecting a Bluetooth® phone (P. 444)
To display the screen shown above, press on the steering wheel or
press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and
then select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.
443
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
mobile phone.
Depending on the type of phone,
further phone operations may be
required after inputting the pass-
code (for example to confirm if
connection is to be received or
not) when registering a phone.
Passcodes are not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compati-
ble Bluetooth® devices. Depend-
ing on the phone, you may need to
select “Yes” to register, or “No” to
cancel on your mobile phone.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is dis-
played, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
STEP 3
444
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Selecting the Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one
device at a time.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 41 )
Select “Connect Phone”.
Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering a
Bluetooth® device. (P. 473 )
The selection indicator is displayed
on left side of the selected device
name.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connected the device.
When the system cannot get the
device names, alternate names will
be displayed such as “Device1”,
“Device2”, etc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
445
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Connecting a Bluetooth® phone
There are two connecting methods available-automatic and manual.
Automatic
When you register your phone, auto connection will be activated. Always
set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where con-
nection can be established.
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, the system will search for a nearby mobile phone
you have registered.
The system automatically connects with the most recent phone that was
connected. The connected result is displayed.
Depending on the type of phone, phone operations may be required (to
confirm if connection is to be received or not) even when automatically
connected.
446
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Manual
When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off
(P. 478), you must connect Bluetooth® manually.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441 )
Select “Connect Phone”.
Select the device to connect.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
■Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will automat-
ically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, con-
nection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected.
■Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
●Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
●It may take time to connect.
447
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Making a call
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure:
■Dialing
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 41)
Select “Dial” on the “Phone” screen.
Input the phone number.
To delete the inputted phone
number, select .
For the first digit, you can enter “+”
by selecting “” for a while.
Press on the steering wheel or select .
Depending on the type of phone, when internet communication func-
tions such as skype are available, phone operations (selecting between
normal phone communication or internet communication) may be nec-
essary after dialing operations are performed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
448
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Dialing from the phonebook
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your
mobile phone. The system has one phonebook for each telephone. Up
to 1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook.
(P. 462 )
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 41 )
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data to call
from the list.
If the phonebook is empty, a mes-
sage will be displayed. (P. 4 49 )
Choose the number and then
press on the steering wheel or
select .
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
449
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
●When the phonebook is empty
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the
system.
Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP
incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If your mobile phone does not sup-
port either PBAP or OPP service, you cannot transfer contacts.
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
If the phonebook is empty, a mes-
sage will be displayed.
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phone
Select “Yes” if you want to transfer new contacts from a mobile
phone.
Select “No” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts.
Depending on the type of phone, phone operations may be nec-
essary when transferring contacts by PBAP.
For PBAP incompatible and OPP compatible Bluetooth® phone
Select “Transfer” if you want to transfer new contacts from a
mobile phone.
Select “Cancel” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts.
You need to operate your phone to transfer new contacts.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 3
450
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 41 )
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and choose
the desired number to make a call.
■Dialing from history
You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.
“All”: all the calls below which were memorized
“Missed”: calls which you missed
“Incoming”: calls which you received
“Outgoing”: calls which you called
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 41 )
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and choose
the desired data from the list.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
451
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Press on the steering wheel or
select .
■Calling using voice recognition
Calls can be made by giving a voice command.
Press the talk switch.
To cancel voice recognition press and hold the talk switch.
Following the system guidance,
wait for the beep, and then say the
desired voice commands.
Voice prompts on/off
Voice commands
Voice commands are marked
with .
Canceling voice recognition
system
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
452
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
●Dial by name
The procedure below shows “Call <name>” or “Call <name> at <type>”.
Follow similar procedures for the other operations.
Press the talk switch.
Say the name, or the name and type of phone, of a registered
contact.
Say “Dial” or press on the
steering wheel.
Say or select “Go Back” to return
to the previous screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
■Call history list
●If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone-
book, the name is displayed in the call history.
●If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is dis-
played in the call history.
■When driving
The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history”
(only the 6th page of “All” tab) are unavailable.
■International calls
Depending on the mobile phone in use, you may not be able to make international
calls.
■Calling by using the latest call history item
Press on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen.
Press on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.
Press on the steering wheel to select the latest history item.
Press on the steering wheel or select to call the latest history
item.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
453
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Voice guidance function
●Voice guidance for the voice recognition system can be skipped by pressing the
talk switch.
●When “Voice Prompts (on/off)” is selected, voice recognition will be tempo-
rarily suspended. Press the talk switch again.
●Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting
when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk
switch.
■Using voice command
●Using voice command “Call <name>” or “Call <name> at <type>”
• In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Call <name>” or “Call
<name> at <type>”, after saying “Call” say the name, or the name and type of
phone, of a contact.
For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or “Call”, “Mary Davis”, “at”, “Mobile”
• There are 4 types of phones: Home, Mobile, Work and Other.
• Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized.
Change names in the phonebook to full names.
• Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed.
After confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.
• When the system recognizes multiple names from the phonebook, a name
candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not dis-
played on the top of the screen, say the number of the name from the candi-
date list (number 1 or number 2) to select a name from the candidate list.
• When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a
candidate list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from
the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a phone number from the
candidate list.
454
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
●Using voice command “Dial <number>”
• In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Dial <number>”, after
saying “Dial” say the phone number.
• Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is 2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven eight”
Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty seven eight”
• The system can recognize the following types of the phone numbers:
3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number)
11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number)
• As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete num-
ber without stopping.
• When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number can-
didate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired phone number is not
displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone num-
ber from the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a phone number
from the candidate list.
●Using voice command “International call”.
Up to 20 digits can be recognized when using the international call function. The
number can also be divided into multiple groups and recognized.
■When using voice recognition
Speak clearly when using the voice recognition, otherwise the system may not cor-
rectly recognize your voice. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to
recognize your voice.
455
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
To answer the phone:
• Press on the steering wheel.
• Select .
■To refuse a call
Press on the steering wheel or select .
■To adjust the incoming call volume
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches or volume knob.
■International calls
Depending on the cellular phone in use, received international calls may not be dis-
played correctly.
456
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
■To adjust the receiver volume
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches or the volume knob.
■To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Select “Mute”.
■Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook.
Select “0-9”.
Input the number.
STEP 1
STEP 2
457
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phone book, “Send”
and “Exit” are displayed on the
right side of the screen.
*: Repeated tone symbols are sym-
bols or numbers displayed as p or
w, that come after the phone num-
ber. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1 )
Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and select “Send”.
If you select “Exit”, this function will end.
■To transfer a call
Select “Handset Mode” to change from Hands-free call to mobile
phone call.
Select “Handsfree Mode” to change from mobile phone call to Hands-
free call.
■To hang up
Press on the steering wheel or select .
STEP 3
STEP 4
458
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incoming
call message will be displayed.
To talk with the other party:
• Press on the steering wheel.
• Select .
To refuse the call:
• Press on the steering wheel.
• Select .
Every time you press on the steering wheel or select during
call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.
■Transferring calls
●It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the mobile phone while driving.
●If you transfer from the mobile phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will
be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
●Transfer method and operate may vary according to the mobile phone used.
●For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■Call waiting operation
Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and mobile
phone.
459
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Setting the hands-free system
You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.
Setting the sound
Phonebook settings
To display the screen shown above, follow the steps below.
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio control-
ler.
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
460
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Setting the sound
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 459)
Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Changes the speaker volume
(P. 460)
Changes the ring tone volume
(P. 460)
Changes the ring tone
(P. 461)
Restore default settings
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
■Setting the volume
Select “Call Volume” or “Ring Tone Volume” on the “Phone
Sound Settings” screen.
Select “-” or “+” to lower or raise
the volume, and then “OK”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
461
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Setting the ring tone
Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen.
Select “Tone1”, “Tone2” or “Tone3”
to change the ring tone, and then
“OK”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
462
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Phonebook settings
The phonebook manages a maximum of 5 phones in total. The data for
1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each
phonebook.
Managing the contacts
Managing the speed dials
Deleting the call history
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 459)
Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
463
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Managing the contacts
●Transferring a phone number
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth phone to the
system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP
incompatible Bluetooth phones. If your mobile phone does not support
either PBAP or OPP services, you cannot transfer contacts.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462 )
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Transfer Contacts”.
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones
Automatic phonebook down-
load on/off
The phonebook data can be auto-
matically transferred.
Depending on the mobile phone,
call history will be also transferred.
Update phonebook
The phonebook data can be
updated.
Restore default settings
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
464
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
For PBAP incompatible Bluetooth phones
Replace contacts
The phonebook data can be
replaced.
Add contacts
The phonebook can be added.
●Deleting the phonebook data
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462 )
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Delete Contacts”.
If your phone supports PBAP ser-
vice, “Automatically Download
Contacts” setting needs to be set
to “Off”. (P. 463)
Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
465
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Phonebook data
Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
■Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
■When transferring a phone number
Transfer the phone number while engine is running.
If your mobile phone is OPP or PBAP compatible, you may need to input “1234” by
your mobile phone for OBEX certification.
■When you have selected “Update Contacts” to transfer the phone number
●If your mobile phone does not support PBAP service, you cannot use this func-
tion.
●If your phone supports PBAP service, you can transfer the phonebook data
without operating your phone.
■When you have selected “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contacts” to transfer the
phone number
If your mobile phone does not support OPP service, you cannot use these func-
tions. You can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone.
■Transferring the phone number in a different way (To display the “Transfer
Contacts” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Transfer” on the “Contacts” screen.
■Transferring the phone number while Bluetooth audio is playing
Bluetooth audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer
finishes. It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are using.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
466
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Managing the speed dials
●Registering the speed dial from contacts
You can register the desired phone number from phonebook. Up to 18
numbers per phone can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462 )
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Select “New Speed Dial from
Contacts”.
■Deleting the phonebook data in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
Select “Delete” on the “Contact” screen.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select
“Yes”.
If your phone supports PBAP service, “Automatically Download Contacts” setting
needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 463)
When you delete a Bluetooth phone, the phonebook data will be deleted at the
same time.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
467
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Choose the data to register.
Select the desired phone number.
Select the switch you want to reg-
ister the number in.
If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation mes-
sage will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
468
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
●Registering the speed dial from call history
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462 )
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Select “New Speed Dial from Call History” on the “Speed Dials”
screen.
Choose the data to register.
Select the switch you want to reg-
ister the number in.
If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation mes-
sage will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
469
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
●Deleting the speed dial
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462 )
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Select “Delete Speed Dials” on the “Speed Dials” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
■Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
■Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Contacts” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Contacts” screen.
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
470
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
Select “Contacts” or “History” to set new speed dial.
Select “Cancel” to cancel it.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select the desired phone number.
■Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Contact” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
Select “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact” screen.
Select the desired telephone number.
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from contacts” from “STEP6”
(P. 466).
■Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Call History” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select “Add Speed Dial” on the “Call History” screen.
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from call history” from
“STEP5”. (P. 468)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
471
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Deleting the call history
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462 )
Select “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
If your phone supports PBAP service, the “Automatically Download
Contacts” setting needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 4 6 3)
Choose the desired history to
delete.
Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
■Deleting call history in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Delete” on the “Call History” screen.
Follow the steps “Deleting the call history” from “STEP4”. (P. 471)
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
472
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Bluetooth® settings
You can set the Bluetooth system to your desired settings.
Registered devices settings
Connecting telephone
Connecting audio player
Detailed Bluetooth settings
To display the screen shown above, follow the steps below.
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio control-
ler.
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
473
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Registered devices settings
■Registering a Bluetooth device
Bluetooth devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable audio
players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5
Bluetooth devices.
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472 )
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Select “Add New”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
474
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
When this screen is displayed,
input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your Bluetooth
device.
For the operation of the
Bluetooth® device, see the manual
that comes with your Bluetooth®
device.
Depending on the type of phone,
further phone operations may be
required after inputting the pass-
code (for example to confirm if
connection is to be received or
not) when registering a phone.
Passcodes are not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing)
compatible Bluetooth® devices.
Depending on the phone, you may
need to select “Yes” to register, or
“No” to cancel on your mobile
phone.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is
displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
■Removing a Bluetooth device
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472 )
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
475
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Select “Remove”.
Select the device to remove.
A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to remove
the device.
■Displaying a Bluetooth device details
You can confirm and change the device details.
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472 )
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Select “Details”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
476
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Select the device.
Following screen is displayed:
Display device name
Display device address
Display your telephone number
Depending on the model of the
phone, the number may not be
displayed.
Display compatibility profile of
the device
Change connection method
(P. 476)
Restore default settings
When you complete settings, select “OK”.
●Changing connection method
Select “Connection Method” on the “Device Details” screen.
Select “From Vehicle” or “From
Audio Player”.
“From Vehicle”: Connect the audio
system to the portable audio
player.
“From Audio Player”: Connect the
portable audio player to the audio
system.
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
477
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting the Bluetooth phone
If multiple Bluetooth devices are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth device to be used. You may only use one
device at a time.
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472 )
Select “Connect Phone” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering a
Bluetooth device. (P. 473 )
The selection indicator is displayed
on left side of the selected device
name.
The Bluetooth mark is displayed
when you connected the device.
Selecting the audio player
If multiple Bluetooth devices are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth device to be used. You may only use one
device at a time.
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472 )
Select “Connect Audio Player” on the “Bluetooth* Settings”
screen.
Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering a
Bluetooth device. (P. 473 )
The selection indicator is displayed
on left side of the selected device
name.
The Bluetooth mark is displayed
when you connected the device.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
478
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Detailed Bluetooth settings
You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth settings.
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472 )
Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” on the “Bluetooth*
Settings” screen.
Following screen is displayed:
Change Bluetooth power on/
off
You can change Bluetooth func-
tion to “On” or “Off”
Display device name
Change passcode (P. 479 )
Display device address
Restore default settings
Display compatibility profile of
the system
Change displaying telephone
status on/off
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting telephone
Change displaying audio player
status on/off
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting audio player
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
479
3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Interior features
■Editing the passcode
You can change the passcode that you use to register your Bluetooth
device in the system.
Select “Passcode” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Input a passcode, and select “OK”.
To delete the inputted phone
number, select .
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
480
3-4. Using the audio system
Audio system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system)
CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio (type A)
481
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio (type B)
Title Page
Using the radio P. 48 3
Using the CD player P. 492
Playing MP3 and WMA discs P. 501
Operating an iPod P. 51 0
Operating a USB memory P. 52 0
Bluetooth® audio system P. 530
Optimal use of the audio system P. 552
Using the AUX port P. 554
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 556
Hands-free system for mobile phones P. 56 0
482
3-4. Using the audio system
■Using mobile phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a mobile phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■Certification
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
●This product is a class 1 laser product classified under the Safety of laser products,
IEC 60825-1:2007, and contains a class 1 M laser module. To ensure continued
safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the
product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION - CLASS 1 M INVISIBLE LASER
RADIATION WHEN OPEN, DO NOT
VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS.
483
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the radio
Type A
Traffic information button
Preset station buttons
Radio text message button
Scan button
Seek button
Channel category button
Frequency adjustment
(AM/FM mode) and
channel (SAT mode)
knob
AM
FM/SAT
mode buttons
“PWR
VOL” knob
Power Volume
484
3-4. Using the audio system
Type B
Traffic information button
Preset station buttons
Radio text message button
Scan button
Seek button
Channel category button
Frequency adjustment
knob
AM
FM buttons
“PWR
VOL” knob
Power Volume
485
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Search for the desired stations by turning or pressing “”
or “” on .
Press and hold the button (from to ) the station is to
be set to until you hear a beep.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press the button again.
■Scanning all the radio stations within range
Press .
All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press the button again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
486
3-4. Using the audio system
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■Receiving RBDS broadcasts
Press “” or “” on during FM reception.
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
●“ROCK”
●“EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
●“CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
●“R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
●“INFORM” (Information)
●“RELIGION”
●“MISC” (Miscellaneous)
●“ALERT” (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RBDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the dis-
play.
Press , or “” or “” on .
The radio seeks or scans for stations of the relevant program type.
STEP 1
STEP 2
487
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Displaying radio station names
Press .
■Displaying radio text messages
Press twice.
A text message is displayed when “MSG” is shown on the screen.
If the text continues past the end of the display, is displayed. Press and
hold until you hear a beep.
XM® Satellite Radio (type A)
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press .
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed:
“SAT1” “SAT2” “SAT3”
Turn to select the desired channel in all the categories or
press “” or “” on to select the desired channel in
the current category.
■Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from to
) the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep.
■Changing the channel category
Press “” or “” on .
STEP 1
STEP 2
488
3-4. Using the audio system
■Scanning the XM® Satellite Radio channels
●Scanning the channels in the current category
Press .
When the desired channel is reached, press the button
again.
●Scanning the preset channels
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the desired channel is reached, press the button
again.
■Displaying text information
Press .
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed:
●CH NAME
●TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
●NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
●CH NUMBER
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
489
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
●Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may
adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.
●It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains and transmitters.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear spoiler and the rear window. To
maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other
metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts pro-
vided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.
Visit on the web at www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem.
Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number will
appear.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
490
3-4. Using the audio system
■If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
“ANTENNA”
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surround-
ing antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
“UNAUTH”
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption
code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscrip-
tion information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose the “CH000” and all the free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to lis-
ten to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite
Radio.
“NO SIGNAL”
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stron-
ger signal.
“LOADING” The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
“OFF AIR” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any pro-
gramming. Select another channel.
491
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-
438-9677 (Canada).
■Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisee sous reserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage prejudiciable.
“-----”
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
“CH UNAVL”
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previ-
ous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change auto-
matically, select another channel.
492
3-4. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Type A
“PWR
VOL” knob
Track selector button
Eject
button
Playback button
Search playback button
Load
button
CD selector button
Random playback button
Repeat play button
Tex t b utto n
Power Volume
Playback/Pause button
493
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Type B
“PWR
VOL” knob
Track selector button
Eject
button
Playback button
Search playback button
Load
button
CD selector button
Random playback button
Repeat play button
Tex t b utto n
Power Volume
Playback/Pause button
494
3-4. Using the audio system
Loading a CD
■Loading a CD
Press .
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a
CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
■Loading multiple CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a
CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is being inserted.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert
the next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel the operation, press . If you do not insert a disc within 15
seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
495
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Ejecting CDs
■Ejecting a CD
To select the CD to be ejected,
press “” or “” on .
The selected disc number is shown
on the display.
Press and remove the CD.
■Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks
■Selecting a track
Press “” to move up or “” to move down using until
the desired track number is displayed.
■Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
■Scanning tracks
Press .
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press again.
Press the button again when the desired track is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
496
3-4. Using the audio system
Selecting a CD
■Selecting a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on .
■Scanning loaded CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press again.
Press the button again when the desired CD is reached.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press .
Random playback
■Current CD
Press .
Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press again.
■All CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
497
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Repeat play
■Repeating a track
Press .
To cancel, press again.
■Repeating all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press again.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time CD title Track title
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 or more characters, pressing and holding until you hear a
beep enables to display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been operated for more
than 6 seconds, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed prop-
erly or may not be displayed at all.
498
3-4. Using the audio system
■When “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside
the player. Wait for a while and then press . If the CD still cannot
be played back, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not be used.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods of time
The discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
499
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD load/eject function.
●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
●Low-quality and deformed CDs
●CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off
500
3-4. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
●Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
501
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Eject button
Playback button
Search playback button
Load button
Disc selector button
File selector knob
Random playback button
Repeat play button
Text b u tt o n
File selector button
Playback/Pause button
Folder selector buttons
“PWR
VOL” knob
Power Volume
502
3-4. Using the audio system
Type B
Eject button
Playback button
Search playback button
Load button
Disc selector button
File selector knob
Random playback button
Repeat play button
Text b u tt o n
File selector button
Playback/Pause button
Folder selector buttons
“PWR
VOL” knob
Power Volume
503
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 494, 495
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 496
Selecting and scanning a folder
■Selecting a folder one at a time
Press or to select the desired folder.
■Returning to the first folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
■Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
STEP 1
STEP 2
504
3-4. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting a file
Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired
file.
■Scanning the files in a folder
Press .
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press again.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press .
Random playback
■Playing files from a folder in random order
Press .
To cancel, press again.
■Playing all the files from a disc in random order
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press again.
505
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Repeat play
■Repeating a file
Press .
To cancel, press again.
■Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press again.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Folder no./File no./Elapsed time Folder name File name Album title
(MP3 only) Track title Artist name
506
3-4. Using the audio system
■CD player protection feature
P. 497
■Display
P. 497
■When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside
the player. Wait for a while and then press . If the CD still cannot be
played back, contact your Lexus dealer.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■Discs that can be used
P. 498
■Lens cleaners
P. 498
■If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods of time
P. 498
507
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
508
3-4. Using the audio system
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used:
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be dis-
played correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
509
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depend-
ing on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
P. 499
■CD player precautions
P. 50 0
510
3-4. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
■Connecting an iPod
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it
is not turned on.
STEP 1
STEP 2
511
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Control panel
Type A
Tex t b utto n
Repeat play button
Playback button
Playback/Pause button
Go back button
Song selector button
Shuffle playback button
iPod menu/
Song selector knob
“PWR
VOL” knob
Power Volume
512
3-4. Using the audio system
Type B
Tex t b utto n
Repeat play button
Playback button
Playback/Pause button
Go back button
Song selector button
Shuffle playback button
iPod menu/
Song selector knob
“PWR
VOL” knob
Power Volume
513
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a play mode
Press to select iPod menu mode.
Turning changes the play mode in the following order:
“PLAYLISTS”“ARTISTS”“ALBUMS”“SONGS”
“PODCASTS”“GENRES”“COMPOSERS”
“AUDIOBOOKS”
Press to select the desired play mode.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
514
3-4. Using the audio system
■Play mode list
■Selecting a list
Turn to display the first selection list.
Press to select the desired item.
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press
.
Play mode First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
“PLAYLISTS” Playlists select Songs select - -
“A R T I S T S ” Artists select Albums select Songs select -
“A L B U M S ” Albums select Songs select - -
“SONGS” Songs select ---
“PODCASTS”
Albums select Songs select - -
“GENRES” Genre select Artists select Albums select Songs select
“COMPOSERS”
Composers
select Albums select Songs select -
“AUDIOBOOKS”
Songs select ---
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
515
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting songs
Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired
song.
Playing and pausing songs
To play or pause a song, press .
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Shuffle playback
■Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press .
To cancel, press again.
■Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press again.
Repeat play
Press .
To cancel, press again.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time Album title Tra c k t i t l e Artist name
516
3-4. Using the audio system
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
Press to enter iPod menu mode.
Pressing changes sound modes. (P. 552)
■About iPod
●“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
●iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
STEP 1
STEP 2
517
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■iPod functions
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the
iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may
not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to
a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve the problem.
●While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own con-
trols. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.
●When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so,
charge the iPod before use.
●Supported models (P. 51 8 )
■iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.
■Display
P. 497
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“EMPTY”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected
playlist.
“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible.
Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.
518
3-4. Using the audio system
■Compatible models
The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices
can be used with this system.
●Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
•iPod classic
•iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
•iPhone 4
•iPhone 3GS
•iPhone 3G
•iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
●Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
●Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
●Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
519
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■If the armrest cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the
armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may
damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.
■To prevent damage to iPod
●Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-
nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter-
minal.
520
3-4. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
■Connecting a USB memory
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
STEP 1
STEP 2
521
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Control panel
Type A
Repeat play button Folder selector buttons
Random playback button
File selector button
Search playback button
File selector knob
Playback/Pause button
Text button
“PWR
VOL” knob
Power Volume
Playback button
522
3-4. Using the audio system
Type B
Repeat play button Folder selector buttons
Random playback button
File selector button
Search playback button
File selector knob
Playback/Pause button
Text button
“PWR
VOL” knob
Power Volume
Playback button
523
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting and scanning a folder
■Selecting folders one at a time
Press or to select the desired folder.
■Returning to the first folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
■Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting a file
Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired
file.
■Scanning the files in a folder
Press .
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press again.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press .
STEP 1
STEP 2
524
3-4. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■Playing files from a folder in random order
Press .
To cancel, press again.
■Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press again.
Repeat play
■Repeating a file
Press .
To cancel, press again.
■Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press again.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time Folder name File name Album title (MP3 only)
Track title Artist name
525
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■USB memory functions
●Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device
itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the
device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting
it once again may resolve the problem.
●If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and
reconnected, format the memory.
■Display
P. 497
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
526
3-4. Using the audio system
■USB memory
●Compatible devices
USB memories that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
527
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
528
3-4. Using the audio system
●MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to
USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first
folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have
not been changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in
which it was last used.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be skipped (not played).
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memories or operate the controls.
529
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■If the armrest cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the sys-
tem, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as
this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc.
■To prevent damage to USB memories
●Do not leave USB memories in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it
is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory
or its terminal.
530
3-4. Using the audio system
Bluetooth® audio system
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the portable player is switched off
●If the portable player is not connected
●If the portable player’s battery is low
●If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
●If metal is covering or touching the portable player
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a por-
table digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via
wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of
playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does
not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Title Page
Using the Bluetooth® audio system P. 535
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 540
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 54 4
Bluetooth® audio system setup P. 551
531
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (P. 587 )
■About Bluetooth®
■Compatible models
●Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
●Following profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed:
Ver. 1.2)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Con-
formed: Ver. 1.3)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be con-
nected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions
may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
532
3-4. Using the audio system
■Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-
tion est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
533
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it
is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20
cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énon-
cées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélec-
triques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités
: mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna
type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated
power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente
(p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communica-
tion satisfaisante.
534
3-4. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable car-
diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between them-
selves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other
than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pace-
makers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufac-
turer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
535
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■Audio unit
Display
A message, name, number,
etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection con-
dition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth® audio system
cannot be used.
536
3-4. Using the audio system
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without
the need to check the display or operate .
■Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is regis-
tered for the selected function
537
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure
below to register (pair) a portable player:
Press and select “BT•A MENU” using .
Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using .
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration
instructions are heard.
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command
or .
Register a portable player name by either of the following meth-
ods:
a. Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to be
registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the opera-
tion of the portable player.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
538
3-4. Using the audio system
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be regis-
tered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a
Bluetooth® phone is heard.
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or .
(Bluetooth® phone P. 562)
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
“Setup”
“BT•A
Setup”
“Pair Audio” Registering a portable player
“Connect” Selecting a portable player to
be used
“Change Name” Changing the registered name
of a portable player
“List Audios” Listing the registered portable
players
“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey
“Delete Audio” Deleting a registered portable
player
“System
Setup”
“Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance volume
“Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize” Initializing the system
STEP 7
539
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
●When driving on rough roads
●When driving at high speeds
●When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■Operations that cannot be performed while driving
●Operating the system using
●Registering a portable player to the system
■Changing the passkey
P. 549
540
3-4. Using the audio system
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Type A
“PWR
VOL” knob
Track selector button
Playback button
Search playback button
Random playback button
Repeat play button
Tex t b utto n
Power Volume
Playback/Pause button
Album selector buttons
BT·A menu knob
541
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Type B
“PWR
VOL” knob
Track selector button
Playback button
Search playback button
Random playback button
Repeat play button
Tex t b utto n
Power Volume
Playback/Pause button
Album selector buttons
BT·A menu knob
542
3-4. Using the audio system
Selecting an album
To select the desired album, press or .
Selecting tracks
Press “” or “” on to select the desired track.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press .
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Random playback
Press .
To cancel, press again.
Repeat play
Press .
To cancel, press again.
Scanning tracks
Press .
To cancel, press again.
543
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Switching the display
Press .
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time Album title Tra c k t i t l e Artist name
■Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available.
■Display
P. 497
■Error messages
“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.
544
3-4. Using the audio system
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows the
system to function. The following functions can be used for registered por-
table players:
■Functions and operation procedures
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or :
●Registering a portable player
1. “Setup” 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”
3. “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
●Selecting a portable player to be used
1. “Setup” 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”
3. “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
●Changing the registered name of a portable player
1. “Setup” 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”
3. “Change Name”
●Listing the registered portable players
1. “Setup” 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”
3. “List Audio Players (List Audios)”
●Changing the passkey
1. “Setup” 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”
3. “Set Passkey”
●Deleting a registered portable player
1. “Setup” 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”
3. “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
545
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Pattern B
Press to select “BT•A MENU”.
Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using .
Select one of the following functions using a voice command
or .
●Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
●Selecting a portable player to be used
“Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
●Changing the registered name of a portable player
“Change Name”
●Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players (List Audios)”
●Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
●Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
546
3-4. Using the audio system
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or ,
and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 537 )
Selecting a portable player to be used
Select “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” using a voice com-
mand or .
Pattern A
Select the portable player to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the portable player to be used using .
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
547
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Pattern A
Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio player”,
and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
Pattern B
Select “From Car” or “From Audio”, using .
If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically con-
nected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in either
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Changing the registered name of a portable player
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of
the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice com-
mand or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
STEP 3
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
548
3-4. Using the audio system
Pattern B
Select the desired portable player name to be changed using
.
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using , and
say the new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio Players (List Audios)” using a voice command or
. The list of registered portable players will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read
aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become
available:
●Selecting a portable player: “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
●Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
●Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
549
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Con-
firm” using a voice command or .
Pattern B
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using .
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not
necessary.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
STEP 3
550
3-4. Using the audio system
Deleting a registered portable player
Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice com-
mand or .
Pattern A
Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the desired portable player to be deleted using .
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone, the
registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice
guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or .
(Bluetooth® phone P. 562)
■The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
STEP 3
551
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Bluetooth® audio system setup
■System setup items and operation procedures
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or :
(P. 58 4 )
Pattern B
Press to select “BT•A MENU”.
Select “System Setup” using .
Select one of the following items using :
●Setting voice guidance volume
“Guidance Vol” (
P. 586)
●Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
“Device Name” (
P. 586)
●Initializing the system
“Initialize” (
P. 587)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
552
3-4. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
■Changing sound quality modes
Press .
Pressing the button changes sound modes in the following order:
“BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”“A S L”
Displays the current mode
Changes the following set-
tings:
• Sound quality and volume
balance
P. 553
The sound quality and balance
setting can be changed to pro-
duce the best sound.
• Automatic Sound Levelizer
on/off
P. 553
553
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Adjusting sound quality
Turning adjusts the level.
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
Turning the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) on/off
Turning clockwise turns on the ASL, and turning counter-
clockwise turns off the ASL.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.
Mode
displayed
Sound qual-
ity mode Level Turn counter-
clockwise
Tu r n c l o c k -
wise
“BAS” Bass*-5 to 5
Low High“MID” Mid-range*-5 to 5
“TRE” Tr e b l e *-5 to 5
“FAD”
Front/rear
volume
balance
F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front
“BAL”
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
554
3-4. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjust-
ments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Press .
STEP 1
STEP 2
AUX port
STEP 3
555
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■If the armrest cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to
the system, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the
armrest as this may damage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc.
■To prevent damage to portable audio device
●Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio
device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its
terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio
device or its terminal.
556
3-4. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Turning the power on
Press when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you hear
a beep.
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Turns the power on, selects
an audio source
Increases/decreases volume
Radio mode: Selects a radio
station
CD mode: Selects a track, file
(MP3 and WMA) and disc
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and album
iPod mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode: Selects
a file and folder
557
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Changing the audio source
Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If no discs are
inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped.
Type A:
FM1FM2SAT1SAT2SAT3CD player
Bluetooth® audioAUXiPod or USB memory
AMFM1
Type B:
FM1FM2CD playerBluetooth® audioAUX
iPod or USB memoryAMFM1
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-
ume.
Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
Press to select radio mode.
Press “” or “” on to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “” or “” on the button
until you hear a beep.
STEP 1
STEP 2
558
3-4. Using the audio system
Selecting a track/file or song
Press to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB
memory mode.
Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or song.
Selecting an album
Press to select Bluetooth® audio mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
Selecting a folder
Press to select USB memory mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
Selecting a disc in the CD player
Press to select CD mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
■Canceling automatic selection of a radio station
Press again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
559
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
560
3-4. Using the audio system
Hands-free system for mobile phones
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless
data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the
hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Title Page
Using the hands-free system P. 565
Making a phone call P. 573
Setting a mobile phone P. 578
Security and system setup P. 584
Using the phone book P. 588
561
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the mobile phone is switched off
●If you are outside service range
●If the mobile phone is not connected
●If the mobile phone's battery is low
●If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
●If metal is covering or touching the phone
■When using the hands-free system
●The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
●If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
●If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
●Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
●In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• When a window is open
• When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• When the air conditioning is set to high
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (P. 587 )
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
562
3-4. Using the audio system
■Compatible models
Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5)
and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1.
If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth®
phone.
■Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-
tion est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
563
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it
is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20
cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énon-
cées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélec-
triques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités
: mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna
type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated
power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente
(p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communica-
tion satisfaisante.
564
3-4. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable car-
diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between them-
selves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other
than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pace-
makers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufac-
turer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to mobile phones
Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the phone.
565
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)
■Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection con-
dition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.
Reception level
566
3-4. Using the audio system
■Steering wheel switches
Volume
During an incoming call:
Adjusts the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call:
Adjusts the receiver volume
The voice guidance volume can-
not be adjusted using this but-
ton.
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system
on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system
off/ends a call/refuses a call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
■Microphone
567
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without
the need to check the display or operate .
■Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is regis-
tered for the selected function
568
3-4. Using the audio system
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a
mobile phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration
mode automatically when starting the system with no mobile phone reg-
istered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a mobile phone:
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are
heard.
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or .
Register a phone name by either of the following methods:
a. Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to be
registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the mobile phone is heard.
Input the passkey into the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation
of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio player can
be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a
Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
569
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or .
(Bluetooth® audio player P. 531)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■Normal operation
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
“Callback” - - Dialing a number stored in the
incoming call history memory
“Redial” - - Dialing a number stored in the
outgoing call history memory
“Phonebook”
“A d d E n t r y ” -Adding a new phone number
“Change
Name” -Changing the registered name
in the phone book
“Delete
Entry” -Deleting the registered data
“Del Spd
Dial” -Deleting speed dials
“List
Names” -Listing the registered data
“Speed
Dial” -Setting speed dials
STEP 6
570
3-4. Using the audio system
“Setup”
“Security”
“Set PIN” Setting a PIN code
“Phbk Lock” Locking the phone book
“Phbk Unlock” Unlocking the phone book
“Phone
Setup”
“Pair Phone” Registering the mobile phone
to be used
“Connect” Selecting a mobile phone to be
used
“Change Name” Changing the registered name
of a mobile phone
“List Phones” Listing the registered mobile
phones
“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey
“Delete Phone” Deleting a registered mobile
phone
“System
Setup”
“Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance volume
“Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize” Initializing the system
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
571
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Short cut key operation
First menu Second menu Operation detail
“Dial XXX (name)” -Dialing a name registered in the
phone book
“Phone book add
Entry” -Adding a new phone number
“Phone book Change
name” -Changing a registered name in
the phone book
“Phone book Delete
Entry” -Deleting the registered data
“Phone book List
names” -Listing the registered data
“Phone book Set
Speed Dial” -Setting speed dials
“Phone book Delete
Speed Dial” -Deleting speed dials
“Dial XXX (number)” -Dialing by inputting a number
“Phonebook” “Phonebook Unlock” Unlocking the phone book
“Phonebook Lock” Locking the phone book
572
3-4. Using the audio system
■Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automati-
cally increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
(star), and + (plus).
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
●When driving on rough roads
●When driving at high speeds
●When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■Operations that cannot be performed while driving
●Operating the system using
●Registering a mobile phone to the system
■Changing the passkey
P. 58 1
573
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Making a phone call
■Making a phone call
●Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
●Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
●Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”
■Receiving a phone call
●Answering a phone call
●Refusing a phone call
■Transferring a phone call
■Call waiting
■Using the call history memory
●Dialing
●Storing number in the phone book
●Deleting
574
3-4. Using the audio system
Dialing by inputting a number
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using .
Dialing by inputting a name
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. Press the talk switch
when the desired name is read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using .
Speed dialing
Press the off-hook switch.
Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.
Press the off-hook switch.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
575
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
When receiving a phone call
■Answering a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
■Refusing a phone call
Press the on-hook switch.
Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system while
dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following meth-
ods:
a. Operate the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation
of the phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch*1.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2.
*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the mobile phone to the system during a call.
*2: While the vehicle is in motion, calls cannot be transferred from
the system to the mobile phone.
Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the fol-
lowing options will become available:
●Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the off-
hook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between
calls.)
●Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch.
576
3-4. Using the audio system
Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history
memory:
Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number
stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back” (when
using a number stored in the incoming call history memory).
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is dis-
played.
b. Select the desired number using .
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice com-
mand or .
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then
“Confirm” using a voice command or .
Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using a voice command
or .
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
577
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Call waiting
●If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.
●Call waiting operation may differ depending on your mobile phone and service
provider.
■Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history
memories.
■When talking on the phone
●Do not talk at the same time as the other party.
●Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
578
3-4. Using the audio system
Setting a mobile phone
Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows the sys-
tem to function. The following functions can be used for registered mobile
phones:
■Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or :
●Registering a mobile phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Pair Phone”
●Selecting a mobile phone to be used
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Connect Phone (Connect)”
●Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Change Name”
●Listing the registered mobile phones
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “List Phones”
●Changing the passkey
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Set Passkey”
●Deleting a registered mobile phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Delete Phone”
579
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Registering a mobile phone
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or , and perform the
procedure for registering a mobile phone. (P. 568)
Selecting a mobile phone to be used
Select “Connect Phone (Connect)” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
Select the mobile phone to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the mobile phone to be used using .
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
580
3-4. Using the audio system
Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the name of the mobile phone to be changed by either of
the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice com-
mand or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using
.
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using , and
say the new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
581
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Listing the registered mobile phones
Select “List Phones” using a voice command or . The list of regis-
tered mobile phones will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a mobile phone is being read
aloud selects the mobile phone, and the following functions will become
available:
●Selecting a mobile phone: “Connect Phone (Connect)”
●Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
●Deleting a mobile phone: “Delete Phone”
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Con-
firm” using a voice command or .
STEP 1
STEP 2
582
3-4. Using the audio system
Pattern B
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using .
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not
necessary.
Deleting a registered mobile phone
Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the mobile phone to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
583
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Pattern B
Select the desired mobile phone to be deleted using .
If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio player,
the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A
voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or .
(Bluetooth® audio player P. 531)
■The number of mobile phones that can be registered
Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system.
STEP 2
STEP 3
584
3-4. Using the audio system
Security and system setup
■Security setting items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or :
●Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Set PIN”
●Locking the phone book
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)”
●Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk
Unlock)”
■System setup items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using
:
●Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Guidance Vol”
●Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Device Name”
●Initializing the system
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Initialize”
585
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Setting or changing the PIN
■Setting a PIN
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or .
Enter a PIN using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
■Changing the PIN
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or .
Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or .
Enter a new PIN using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
Select “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook Unlock
(Phbk Unlock)” using a voice command or .
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
586
3-4. Using the audio system
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Con-
firm” using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN using .
Setting voice guidance volume
Select “Guidance Vol” using .
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
Select “Device Name” using .
Turn to display the Bluetooth® device address and name.
Select “Go Back” using to return to “System Setup”.
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
587
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Initializing the system
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using .
Select “Confirm” again using .
■Initialization
●The following data in the system can be initialized:
•Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
•Speed dials
• Registered mobile phone data
•Security code
• Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data
• Passkey for the mobile phones
• Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players
•Guidance volume
• Receiver volume
• Ring tone volume
●Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its
original state.
■When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
●Dialing by inputting a name
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
●Using the phone book
STEP 1
STEP 2
588
3-4. Using the audio system
Using the phone book
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
●Inputting a phone number using a voice command
●Transferring data from the mobile phone
●Inputting a phone number using
●Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or :
●Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Add Entry”
●Changing the registered name in the phone book
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Change Name”
●Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook” 2. “List Names”
●Setting speed dials
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
●Deleting the registered data
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Entry”
●Deleting speed dials
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”
589
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Adding procedure
Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or .
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:
Inputting a telephone number using a voice command:
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” using a voice command or .
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the mobile phone:
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice
command or .
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for
details on transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the follow-
ing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is dis-
played, and select “Confirm” using a voice com-
mand.
b. Select the desired data using .
STEP 1
STEP 2
590
3-4. Using the audio system
Inputting a phone number using :
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using .
STEP2-2 Input a phone number using , and press
again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history:
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or .
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice com-
mand or .
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the follow-
ing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice com-
mand.
b. Select the desired data using .
591
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Select the name to be registered by either of the following meth-
ods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” using and say the desired name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
In , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Con-
firm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
Changing the registered name in the phone book
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the name to be changed by either of the following meth-
ods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired
name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the desired name to be changed using .
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
592
3-4. Using the audio system
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using and
say the new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
Listing the registered data
Select “List Names” using a voice command or . The list of the reg-
istered data will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to the “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects
the data, and the following function will become available:
●Dialing: “Dial”
●Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
●Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
●Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
STEP 3
STEP 4
593
3-4. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Setting speed dials
Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command or
.
Pattern A
Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the
following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command
or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired
name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the desired data using .
Select the desired preset button and register the data into speed
dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm” by using a
voice command or .
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
STEP 3
594
3-4. Using the audio system
Deleting the registered data
Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired phone
number.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of
the desired phone number is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the desired data to be deleted using .
Deleting speed dials
Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice com-
mand or .
Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is regis-
tered and select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
■Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
595
3
Interior features
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Front personal lights (P. 596 )
Front interior light (P. 596 )
Shift lever light (when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)
Rear personal lights ( P. 596)
Rear interior light
Door courtesy lights
Scuff lights (if equipped)
Footwell lights
Outer foot lights
596
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights
Turns the lights on/off linked to
door positions.
Turns the lights on/off
Personal lights
Front
Turns the light on/off
Rear
Turns the light on/off
Interior lights and personal lights
597
3-5. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
■Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP” switch
mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked,
and whether the doors are open/closed.
■To prevent battery discharge
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off, the lights will go off auto-
matically after 20 minutes.
●Personal lights
●Interior lights
●Door courtesy lights
●Scuff lights (if equipped)
●Footwell lights
■Customization
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before the lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 8 3 4)
Interior lights and personal lights
598
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
Glove box
Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
Bottle holders/door pockets
Cup holders
Console box/coin holder
Under tray
599
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Glove box
The glove box can be opened by pressing the lock release button and
locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.
Opens
Locks
Unlocks
■Power back door main switch
The power back door main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 58 )
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an
accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the
items stored inside.
Glove box
600
3-6. Using the storage features
Bottle holders/door pockets
Front
The front door pockets can be
opened and closed.
Rear
CAUTION
■Caution while driving (front door pockets)
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■Items unsuitable for the bottle holders
Do not place anything other than bottles in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury.
Bottle holders/door pockets
601
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Cup holders
Front (Center console)
Press down the lid on the farthest
side from the driver.
Front (Instrument panel)
Press in and release the cup
holder.
NOTICE
■When stowing a bottle
Put the cap on before stowing the bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle
holders. The contents may spill.
Bottle holders/door pockets and cup holders
602
3-6. Using the storage features
Rear
Pull down the armrest.
Press down the button on the arm-
rest.
STEP 1
STEP 2
■Cup holder insert
The cup holder insert may be removed for
cleaning.
Cup holders
603
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Even
when the lid is closed, items must not be stored in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■To prevent burns
Put a lid on containers with hot liquids inside.
■When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Cup holders
604
3-6. Using the storage features
Console box
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.
■Tray in the console box
The tray slides forward/backward and can be
removed.
Console box
605
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
■Console box storage space
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■Tr a y
Do not insert items exceeding the height of the tray. Doing so may prevent opening
and closing of the lid.
The console box comes with partition doors.
Partition door A can be removed.
The storage space can be expanded by
opening the partition doors.
Lift the tab
Pull partition door B as shown in the illus-
tration
Partition door B
Par tition
door A
Console box
606
3-6. Using the storage features
Coin holder
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and slide the armrest.
Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
Overhead
Press in the lid.
This box is useful for temporarily
storing sunglasses and similar small
items.
Coin holder and auxiliary boxes
607
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Rear seat
Pull down the armrest.
Pull up the lever to release the lock
and lift the armrest.
STEP 1
STEP 2
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving.
Items stored in the auxiliary box may fall out and cause death or serious injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop.
Auxiliary boxes
608
3-6. Using the storage features
Under tray
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the under tray
Observe the following precautions when putting items in the under tray. Failure to
do so may cause items to be thrown out of the tray in the event of sudden braking or
steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause
driver distraction, resulting in an accident.
●Do not store items in the tray that can easily shift or roll out.
●Do not stack items in the tray higher than the tray's edge.
●Do not put items in the tray that may protrude over the tray's edge.
Under tray
609
3
Interior features
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it back-
ward.
610
3-7. Other interior features
Vanity mirrors
■To prevent battery discharge
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off, the lights will go off auto-
matically after 20 minutes.
NOTICE
■When not in use
Keep the vanity mirror closed.
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
611
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Clock
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
With a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
With the Lexus Display Audio system
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
Without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
612
3-7. Other interior features
■The clock is displayed when
The clock is displayed when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■When the battery is disconnected
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
613
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Outside temperature display
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of -40°F
(-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).
With a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
With the Lexus Display Audio system
The outside temperature is dis-
played on the air conditioning
operation screen. (P. 345)
Without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
614
3-7. Other interior features
■If the temperature does not appear (without the Lexus Display Audio system)
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■When “- -” or “E” is displayed (with the Lexus Display Audio system)
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change:
●When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25
km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
615
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Multi-display light control
■Instrument panel linked brightness control
When the headlight switch is turned on, the brightness of the multi-display will be
reduced in accordance with the brightness of the instrument panel. (P. 192 )
: If equipped
The brightness of the multi-display can be adjusted to four levels.
Press and release the “DISP”
switch until the brightness of the
display is adjusted to the desired
level.
616
3-7. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlets can be used for the following components.
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
120 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W.
Inside the console (12 V)
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.
Open the cover.
Under tray (12V)
Open the cover.
STEP 1
STEP 2
617
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■The power outlets can be used when
12 V
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
120 VAC
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Luggage compartment (12V)
Open the cover.
On the back surface of the console (120 VAC)*
Open the cover.
*: If equipped
618
3-7. Other interior features
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlets
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■To prevent the fuse from being blown
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
12 V: Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
120 VAC: Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection cir-
cuit will cut the power supply.
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■Appliances that may not operate properly (120 VAC)
The following 120 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W:
●Appliances with high initial peak wattage
●Measuring devices that process precise data
●Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
619
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Heated steering wheel
■The heated steering wheel can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■To prevent battery discharge
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
■If the indicator light does not come on
If the indicator light does not come on when the switch is pressed, a malfunction
may have occurred in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■Burns
Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes
in contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering wheel is on:
●Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
●Persons with sensitive skin
●Persons who are fatigued
●Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
: If equipped
The heated steering wheel heats the leather portions on the left and right
of the steering wheel.
Turns the heater on/off
The indicator light comes on
when the heater is operating.
620
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters and ventilators
■Operating condition
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■When not in use
Set the knob at “0”. The indicator light turns off.
: If equipped
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow
by blowing air from the seats.
Turns the seat heater on
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number is, the
warmer the seat becomes.
Blows air from the seat
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number is, the
stronger the airflow becomes.
621
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the seat heaters/ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
622
3-7. Other interior features
Armrest
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
Pull the armrest down for use.
623
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Coat hooks
CAUTION
■Items that must not be hung on the hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death
or serious injury.
To use the coat hook, push it in.
624
3-7. Other interior features
Assist grips
CAUTION
■Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your
seat.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.
An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body
while sitting on the seat.
625
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
STEP 1
STEP 2
*
626
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become diffi-
cult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■When installing the driver's floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially care-
ful to perform this check after cleaning the
floor.
●With the engine stopped and the shift lever
in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.
627
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Luggage compartment features
■Cargo hooks
Pull the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided
for securing loose items.
■Auxiliary boxes
Deck side boxes
Pull the strap upwards when lift-
ing the cover up.
628
3-7. Other interior features
Deck floor box
Pull the lever upwards when lift-
ing the deck board up.
629
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Removing the luggage covers
Front luggage cover
Press the buttons to remove the
luggage cover.
■Luggage cover (if equipped)
Push from above until the claws
on both sides are securely
locked in position.
Pull out the luggage cover and
hook it onto the anchors.
STEP 1
STEP 2
630
3-7. Other interior features
Rear luggage cover
Detach the outer clips of the rear
luggage cover from the back door.
Detach the inner clips of the rear
luggage cover from the back door.
STEP 1
STEP 2
■Installing the rear luggage cover
●Ensure that the luggage cover is in the proper installation position.
Push the clips of the rear luggage cover into the indentions on the back door
until they are locked into place.
●Check that the rear luggage cover is securely attached.
631
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.
632
3-7. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
■Programming the HomeLink
Point the remote control transmit-
ter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink
control buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and
other devices.
STEP 1
633
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the trans-
mitter button. When the
HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash, or
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the “Repro-
gramming a HomeLink button”
instructions. (P. 635 )
Test the HomeLink operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink but-
ton. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a roll-
ing code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
634
3-7. Other interior features
■Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
for the location of the learn button.
Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the sur-
face of the HomeLink.
Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible trans-
ceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
635
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates cor-
rectly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
■Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink button” instructions.
Operating HomeLink
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should turn on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still press-
ing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
STEP 5
STEP 6
636
3-7. Other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside but-
tons for 10 seconds until the indi-
cator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
●The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
the HomeLink button.
■When programming
Depending on radio wave conditions, the direction the remote control transmitter is
pointed and the remaining charge of the transmitter's batteries, there are cases
when programming may be difficult.
637
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLGHSHL4
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4
FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
■When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
638
3-7. Other interior features
Compass
: If equipped
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press for more than 3
seconds.
The location the compass is dis-
played differs according to the
type of inner rear view mirror.
■Displays and directions
Display Direction
“N” North
“NE” Northeast
“E” East
“SE” Southeast
“S” South
“SW” Southwest
“W” West
“NW” Northwest
639
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending on the
geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the com-
pass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibra-
tion”.
■Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold .
A number (1 to 15) appears on the
compass display.
The location the compass is dis-
played differs according to the type
of inner rear view mirror.
STEP 1
STEP 2
640
3-7. Other interior features
Referring to the map above, press to select the number of
the zone you are in.
If the direction is displayed for several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.
■Circling calibration
If “C” appears on the display, drive
the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less in a circle until a direction is
displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until a direction is displayed.
STEP 3
■Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-
ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
●The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near
the inside rear view mirror.)
●The battery has been disconnected.
●A door is open.
641
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.
■To ensure normal operation of the compass
●Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
●During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
642
3-7. Other interior features
Safety Connect
: If equipped
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to pro-
vide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is sup-
ported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per
day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics
hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions,
as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is avail-
able at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
■System components
Microphone
LED light indicators
“SOS” button
643
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
●Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency ser-
vice providers. (P. 645)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
●Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 646)
●Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 646)
●Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 646)
■Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agree-
ment and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription
details.
644
3-7. Other interior features
■Safety Connect Services Information
●Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible dur-
ing Safety Connect.
●Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Con-
tact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center
or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available;
charges vary by subscription term selected.
●Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle
Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in
Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States
(except Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function out-
side of the United States in countries other than Canada.
●Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunica-
tions Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indi-
cate your language of choice when enrolling.
■When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
645
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
●When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns
off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the
service is active.
●The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage
conditions:
• Green indicator light on = Active service
• Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
• Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
• No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the
occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats
the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services
provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
646
3-7. Other interior features
■Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a
police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-
LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Con-
nect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehi-
cle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under cer-
tain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced
Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the
Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at
Lexus.com.
647
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio fre-
quency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards pre-
viously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-
ment) Report 86 [1986]
●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Pro-
tection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evalua-
tions of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the
ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
648
3-7. Other interior features
■Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
FCC ID: XOECDMRF101B
FCC ID: N7NGTM2
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Maintenance and care 4
649
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............. 650
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.............. 653
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements........................ 656
General maintenance .......... 659
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs................................ 663
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions........................... 664
Hood........................................... 667
Positioning a floor jack......... 668
Engine compartment ............ 670
Tires............................................ 684
Tire inflation pressure........... 693
Wheels....................................... 697
Air conditioning filter ........... 699
Electronic key battery........... 701
Checking and replacing
fuses ........................................ 703
Headlight aim ........................... 716
Light bulbs................................. 719
650
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■Automatic car washes
●Before washing the vehicle:
•Fold the mirrors.
• Turn off the power back door system.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
●In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with machine
operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in
damage to the rear spoiler.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows.
●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condi-
tion:
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
651
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■Aluminum wheels
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving
for long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
●When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
●When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
●If something bumps against the windshield
●If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the
raindrop sensor
■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled suffi-
ciently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in , the wipers
may operate unexpectedly in the following
situations, and may result in hands being
caught or other serious injuries and cause
damage to the wiper blades.
OFF
652
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu-
minum wheels etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with
low humidity when storing the wheels.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper
arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to
their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
■When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in , the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may
be damaged.
653
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the leather areas
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
■Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
654
4-1. Maintenance and care
■Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to main-
tain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent
results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 121)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function prop-
erly, resulting in death or severe injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
655
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-
rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach
• Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol
●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior
part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces:
●Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of vehicle. Water may also
cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
656
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure perfor-
mance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular main-
tenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance:
■General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This
can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “War-
ranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s
Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”
or “Warranty Booklet”.
657
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance sched-
ule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
Display the trip meter “A” (P. 192), then turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
While pressing the “ODO/TRIP” button, turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
●Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Keep the “ODO/TRIP” button pressed for
about 5 seconds. The resetting procedure is
complete when “000000” in the trip meter
flashes once and the message in the multi-
information display disappears.
STEP 3
658
4-2. Maintenance
CAUTION
■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible
serious injury or death.
■Handling of the battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after han-
dling. (P. 681)
659
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery Check the connections.
(P. 681 )
Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct level?
(P. 679 )
Engine coolant Is the coolant at the correct level?
(P. 67 7)
Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level?
(P. 674 )
Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser/hoses
The radiator and condenser should
be free from foreign objects.
(P. 678)
Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 683 )
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
660
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal
• The accelerator pedal should move
smoothly (without uneven pedal
effort or catching).
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• When parked on a slope and the
shift lever is in P, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appro-
priate clearance from the floor?
(P. 814 )
• Does the brake pedal have the cor-
rect amount of free play?
(P. 814 )
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too
close to the floor when the brakes
are applied.
Head restraints • Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?
661
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Items Check points
Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Are the headlights aimed cor-
rectly? (P. 716)
Parking brake
• Does the parking brake pedal
move smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be dam-
aged.
Seats • Do the seat controls operate prop-
erly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.
662
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors • Do the doors operate smoothly?
Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock system
work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of
fluid leakage after the vehicle has
been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure cor-
rect?
• The tires should not be damaged or
excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated
according to the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.
Windshield wipers/rear window
wiper
• The wiper blades should not show
any signs of cracking, splitting,
wear, contamination or deforma-
tion.
• The wiper blades should clear the
windshield/rear window without
streaking or skipping.
CAUTION
■If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
663
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the oper-
ation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary
malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
664
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct pro-
cedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 68 1 )
•Warm water
• Baking soda
•Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 679 )
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 67 7 )
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
665
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Items Parts and tools
Engine oil level (P. 674)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses (P. 703) • Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Tire inflation pressure (P. 693) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Headlight aim (P. 716 ) • Phillips-head screwdriver
Radiator and condenser (P. 678)
Washer fluid (P. 6 83)
• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water
or washer fluid)
666
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move sud-
denly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions:
■When working on the engine compartment
●Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine
compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high. (P. 678 )
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in your eyes.
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air.
667
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Hood
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the hood catch and lift
the hood.
STEP 1
STEP 2
668
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■Front
■Rear
669
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or
serious injury:
●When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the
jack.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported
only by the floor jack.
●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
●Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehi-
cle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
670
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 675)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 674)
Battery (P. 6 81)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 679)
Fuse box (P. 703)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 677)
Condenser (P. 678)
Radiator (P. 678)
Electric cooling fans
Washer fluid tank (P. 683)
671
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment cover
■Removing the engine compartment covers
Outside
Front
672
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Installing the clips
NOTICE
■After installing an engine compartment cover
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
673
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Battery cover
Removing the battery cover.
NOTICE
■When installing the battery cover
Securely install the cover over the battery. Failure to do so may cause water to enter
the engine compartment when it rains or the vehicle is washed, resulting in a mal-
function.
674
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may dif-
fer depending on the type of vehi-
cle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
675
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as that already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil
selection P. 80 9
Oil quantity
(Low Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel
■Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situ-
ations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
●When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
●If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
●When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when
driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
●When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
676
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information con-
cerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
677
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 799)
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
678
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling systems.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious inju-
ries, such as burns.
679
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
■Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
Items Clean funnel
680
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, may be a serious problem.
681
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
■After recharging/reconnecting the battery
In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the
system.
Shift the shift lever to P, and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Open and close any of the doors.
Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the proce-
dure.)
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at the above method, contact
your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
682
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury,
take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the battery.
■Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical atten-
tion immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention imme-
diately.
683
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accesso-
ries are turned off.
CAUTION
■When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains
alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
684
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indi-
cators is shown by the “TWI” or
“” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
■Tire rotation
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Front
Front
685
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmit-
ter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 687)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
●When rotating the tires
●When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing
travelling speed or load weight
●When changing the tire size
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire infla-
tion pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 747 )
686
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 815)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Wait for a few minutes in “ENGINE START STOP” switch to on,
and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
687
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique
ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it
is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage.
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage.
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a
system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has sel-
dom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
688
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replace-
ment tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either
the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
■Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction perfor-
mance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be ade-
quate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All sea-
son tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capac-
ity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 302)
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 82 1)
689
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■The initialization operation
●Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire infla-
tion pressure adjustment.
●If you have accidentally turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off during
initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization
will restart automatically when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been
turned to IGNITION ON mode for the next time.
●If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary,
adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold,
and conduct initialization again.
■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warn-
ing light does not blink 3 times.
●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.
690
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Certification for tire pressure warning system
TPMS Transmitter FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est
susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
TPMS Receiver FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
691
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Tire pressure warning system operation
The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire
bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix
tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
●Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
692
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters
and tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-
fied. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 685)
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-
ing ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
694
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge graduations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level,
adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leak-
age.
Put the tire valve cap back on.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
695
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure
that is even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
●Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is bal-
anced.
696
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leak-
age, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as
possible.
697
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Wheels
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warn-
ing in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced,
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 6 8 5)
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of han-
dling control.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions
●Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
●Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
698
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-
genuine wheels.
699
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air condi-
tioning efficiency.
■Removal method
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Open the glove box. Lift and
remove the partition.
Remove the glove box cover.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
700
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance sched-
ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner's
Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the system
When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
Remove the filter cover.
Remove the air conditioning fil-
ter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” mark shown on the
filter should be pointing up.
STEP 4
STEP 5
701
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver
●Small Phillips-head screwdriver
●Lithium battery (CR1632)
■Replacing the battery
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
702
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Use a CR1632 lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance
shops or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufac-
turer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur:
●The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
●The operational range is reduced.
■When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer
can replace the battery for you.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep
away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
703
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
for details about which fuse to check. (P. 70 6)
Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 671)
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
704
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the fuse with the pull-
out tool.
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.
STEP 5
STEP 6
705
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.
Type E
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.
706
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■Engine compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1RDI FAN NO. 1 80 A Electric cooling fans
2RR DEF 50 A Rear window defogger
3AIR SUS 50 A
4HEATER 50 A Air conditioning system
5SPARE 30 A
6SPARE 40 A
7ABS NO. 2 30 A Vehicle stability control
8H-LP CLN 30 A Headlight cleaner
9PBD 30 A Power back door
10 ST 30 A Starter system
11 PD 50 A
A/F, H-LP RH HI, H-LP LH LO, H-LP
RH LO, H-LP LH HI, HORN, S-
HORN
12 ABS NO. 1 50 A Vehicle stability control
707
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
13 EPS 60 A Electric power steering system
14 ALT 140 A
IG1 MAIN, TOWING BATT,
DEICER, TOWING, STOP, RDI FAN
NO. 1, FILTER, RR DEF, AIR SUS,
HEATER, ABS NO. 2, H-LP CLN,
PBD, ECU-IG1 NO. 1, ECU-IG1 NO.
3, GAUGE NO. 1, ECU-IG1 NO. 2,
EPS, FR WIP, RR WIP, FR WASH, RR
WASH, RH S-HTR, LH S-HTR, TAIL,
PANEL, D/L ALT B, FR FOG, FR
DOOR, FL DOOR, RR DOOR, RL
DOOR, PSB, P-SEAT LH, P-SEAT
RH, TI&TE, FUEL OPN, DR LOCK,
OBD, RR FOG, S/ROOF, 4WD,
INVERTER, ECU-ACC, P/POINT,
CIG, RADIO NO. 2
15 AMP1 30 A Audio system
16 EFI MAIN 30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem, electronic controlled transmis-
sion, EFI NO. 1, EFI NO. 2, F/PMP
17 AMP2 30 A Audio system
18 IG2 MAIN 30 A IGN, GAUGE NO. 2, ECU IG 2
19 IP J/B 25 A Power door lock system
20 STR LOCK 20 A Starter system
21 RAD NO. 3 15 A Meters and gauges, navigation sys-
tem, audio system
22 HAZ 15 A Emergency flashers
Fuse Ampere Circuit
708
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
23 ETCS 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem
24 RAD NO. 1 10 A Audio system, navigation system
25 AM2 7.5 A Starter system
26 ECU-B NO. 2 7.5 A
Air conditioning system, front passen-
ger occupant classification system,
audio system, vehicle stability control
system, power windows
27 MAYDAY/TEL 7.5 A MAYDAY/TEL
28 IMMOBI 7.5 A IMMOBI
29 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
30 DRL 7.5 A Daytime running light system
31 IGN 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem
32 DOME 10 A
Vanity mirror lights, luggage compart-
ment lights, interior lights, personal
lights, door courtesy lights, footwell
lights, scuff lights
33 ECU-B NO. 1 10 A
Tilt and telescopic steering, multiplex
communication system, meters and
gauges, driving position memory,
power seats, power back door, head-
up display, starter system, outside rear
view mirror, steering sensor, garage
door opener
Fuse Ampere Circuit
709
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
34 EFI NO. 1 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem, electronic controlled transmis-
sion
35 WIP-S 7.5 A Cruise control
36 ECU-IG1 NO. 4 10 A
Air conditioning system, rear window
defogger, vehicle stability control sys-
tem, electric cooling fans
37 BK/UP LP 7.5 A Back-up lights
38 ECU-IG1 NO. 5 15 A Air conditioning system
39 ECU-IG1 NO. 6 10 A
Head light cleaner, cruise control,
vehicle stability control, air condition-
ing system, Blind Spot Monitor
40 EFI NO. 2 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem
41 F/PMP 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem
42 DEICER 25 A Windshield wipers and washer
43 STOP 7.5 A
Vehicle stability control, vehicle
dynamics integrated management,
stop lights, electronic controlled
transmission, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system, shift lock control system,
starter system
44 TOWING BATT 20 A Trailer battery
45 TOWING 30 A Trailer lights
Fuse Ampere Circuit
710
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
46 FILTER 10 A
47 IG1 MAIN 30 A ECU-IG1 NO. 6, BK/UP LP, ECU-
IG1 NO. 5, ECU-IG1 NO. 4
48 H-LP RH HI 15 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
49 H-LP LH HI 15 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
50 BIXENON 10 A
51 H-LP RH LO 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
52 H-LP LH LO 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
53 HORN 10 A Horn
54 A/F 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem
55 S-HORN 7.5 A S-HORN
Fuse Ampere Circuit
711
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1P/POINT 15 A Power outlet
2ECU-ACC 10 A
Navigation system, air conditioning
system, audio system, multiplex com-
munication system, multi-information
display, head-up display
3CIG 15 A Power outlet
4RADIO NO. 2 7.5 A Audio system, navigation system
5GAUGE NO. 1 10 A
Emergency flashers, navigation sys-
tem, head-up display, air conditioning
system, charging system
6ECU-IG1 NO. 3 10 A
Outside rear view mirror, windshield
wipers and washer, seat heaters,
starter system, power outlet, moon
roof, air conditioning system
712
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7ECU-IG1 NO. 1 10 A
Multiplex communication system,
steering sensor, shift lock control sys-
tem, tilt and telescopic steering, auto-
matic transmission system, power
back door, pre-collision system, vehi-
cle stability control system, tire pres-
sure warning system
8S/ROOF 30 A Moon roof
9FUEL OPN 7.5 A Fuel filler door opener
10 PSB 30 A Pre-collision seat belt
11 TI & TE 30 A Tilt and telescopic steering system
12 DR LOCK 10 A
13 FR FOG 7.5 A Front fog lights
14 P-SEAT LH 30 A Power seat (left-side)
15 4WD 7.5 A AWD system
16 INVERTER 20 A Power outlet
17 RR FOG 7.5 A
18 D/L ALT B 25 A
Multiplex communication system,
power door lock system, power back
door
19 EPS 10 A Electric power steering system
20 ECU-IG1 NO. 2 10 A Intuitive parking assist, AWD system,
pre-collision seat belt
Fuse Ampere Circuit
713
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
21 PANEL 10 A
Switch illumination, navigation system,
automatic transmission system, audio
system, multi-information display, air
conditioning system, multiplex com-
munication system
22 TAIL 10 A
Parking lights, front side marker lights,
tail lights, license plate lights, front fog
lights, towing converter
23 AIR SUS 20 A
24 P-SEAT RH 30 A Power seat (right-side)
25 OBD 7.5 A On-Board diagnosis
26 FR DOOR 25 A Front power window (right-side), out-
side rear view mirror
27 RR DOOR 25 A Rear power window (right-side)
28 FL DOOR 25 A Front power window (left-side), out-
side rear view mirror
29 RL DOOR 25 A Rear power window (left-side)
30 FR WASH 25 A Windshield wipers and washer
31 RR WIP 15 A Windshield wipers and washer
32 RR WASH 20 A Windshield wipers and washer
33 FR WIP 30 A Windshield wipers and washer
34 ECU IG2 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem, front passenger occupant classi-
fication system, SRS airbag system,
stop lights, electronic controlled
transmission, steering lock system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
714
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
35 GAUGE NO. 2 7.5 A Gauge and meters
36 RH S-HTR 15 A Seat heater (right-side)
37 LH S-HTR 15 A Seat heater (left-side)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
715
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 719)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■If there is an overload in the circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify fuse or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
716
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim
■Removing the engine compartment cover
P. 671
■Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
Vehicles with discharge headlights
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
■Before checking the headlight aim
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Sit in the driver’s seat.
Bounce the vehicle several times.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
717
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Adjusting the headlight aim
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Turn bolt A in either direction
using a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns.
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as in step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the headlight cannot be
adjusted using this procedure,
take the vehicle to your Lexus
dealer to adjust the headlight
aim.
STEP 1
STEP 2
718
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Vehicles with discharge headlights
Turn bolt A in either direction
using a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns in mind.
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the headlight cannot be
adjusted using this procedure,
take the vehicle to your Lexus
dealer to adjust the headlight
aim.
STEP 1
STEP 2
719
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement
seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus
dealer.
■Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 817)
■Removing the engine compartment covers
P. 671
■Turning off the power back door main switch
P. 58
■Front bulb locations
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Headlight high beamHeadlight low beam
Front turn signal light
720
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Vehicles with discharge headlights
Front turn signal light
Headlight high beam
721
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
Rear side marker light
Tail light
Tail light
722
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlight high beams
Right side:
Open the cap.
Move the washer fluid filler
opening to allow easy access to
the light bulbs.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
723
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Connect the connector.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlight high beams on once and
visually confirm that no light is leak-
ing through the mounting.
When replacing the right side bulb, install by conducting
with the directions reversed.
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 5
STEP 1
724
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Halogen headlight low beams (if equipped)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlight low beams on once and
visually confirm that no light is leak-
ing through the mounting.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
725
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Front turn signal light
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
726
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Rear turn signal and tail lights
Remove the access hole cover.
Use a flathead screwdriver
wrapped in a cloth.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Tail light
Rear turn signal light
Remove the light bulb.
Tail light
Rear turn signal light
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
727
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Tail and back-up lights
Remove the access hole cover.
Use a flathead screwdriver
wrapped in a cloth.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Tail light
Back-up light
Remove the light bulb.
Tail light
Back-up light
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
728
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Rear side marker light (right side)
Remove the bolts using a Phillips-
head screwdriver and remove the
clip.
Removing the clip
Installing the clip
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
729
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Rear side marker light (left side)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
■Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
●Discharge headlight low beams (if equipped)
●Daytime running lights
●Parking lights
●Front side marker lights
●Front fog lights
●Side turn signal lights
●Stop lights
●High mounted stoplight
●License plate lights
STEP 1
STEP 2
730
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Discharge headlights (if equipped)
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may
go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is
restored.
■LED bulbs
The daytime running lights, parking lights, front side marker lights, LED front fog
lights (if equipped), side turn signal lights, stop lights, high mounted stoplight and
licence plate lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take
your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indi-
cate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following
situations:
●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
731
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning
off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid
getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
●Vehicles with discharge headlights:
While the low beam headlights are turned
on, and for a short time after they have
been turned off, metal components at the
rear of the headlight assembly will be
extremely hot. To prevent burns, do not
touch these metal components until you
are certain they have cooled down.
Metal components
732
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Discharge headlights (if equipped)
●Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light
bulbs).
●Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights
are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result in
serious injury or death by electric shock.
●Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight bulbs,
connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
When trouble arises 5
733
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers............... 734
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ...................................... 735
If you think something is
wrong....................................... 742
Fuel pump shut off system.... 743
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... .................................. 744
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 754
If you have a flat tire................ 774
If the engine will not start .... 789
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ......................... 791
If you lose your keys .............. 792
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.......... 793
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ............................. 796
If your vehicle overheats ..... 799
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 802
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency............................ 804
734
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
■Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating,
the battery may discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle
has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.
5
When trouble arises
735
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Situations needs to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
●The engine is running but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a
flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
2WD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the
front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions.
(P. 73 6 , 74 0 )
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck.
AWD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a tow-
ing dolly. (P. 736, 74 0)
736
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front (2WD models)
Release the parking brake.
From the front (AWD models)
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
5
When trouble arises
737
5-1. Essential information
Using a flatbed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
738
5-1. Essential information
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for 50
miles (80 km) at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehi-
cle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condi-
tion.
Emergency towing procedure
Take out the towing eyelet. (P. 774 )
Type A
Insert the mechanical key (P. 31)
into the groove and release the
claws. With the mechanical key
inserted, remove the eyelet cover
by pulling it towards you.
Type B
Insert the mechanical key (P. 31)
into the groove and release the
claws. With the mechanical key
inserted, remove the eyelet cover
by pulling it towards you.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
739
5-1. Essential information
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten as much as possi-
ble by hand.
Using the tip of the wheel nut
wrench, tighten down the towing
eyelet securely without interfering
with the bumper.
Securely attach a cable or chain to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to
IGNITION ON mode.
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: P. 79 1
STEP 3
STEP 4
■While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
■Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench is installed in the luggage compartment. (P. 7 74 )
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
740
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■When towing the vehicle
2WD models
AWD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front
wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off
the ground.
If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels
contacting the ground, the drivetrain and
related parts may be damaged.
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the ground,
the drivetrain or related parts may be dam-
aged, the vehicle may fly off the truck.
5
When trouble arises
741
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■While towing
●When towing using a rope, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress
on the towing hook and rope.
The towing hook or rope may become damaged, broken debris may hit people
and cause serious damage.
●Do not turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and can not be operated.
■Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could
be damaged while being towed.
■To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.)
Never dinghy tow your vehicle to prevent
causing serious damage to the Active Torque
Control 4WD system (AWD models) and
transmission. (P. 323)
742
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal.
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking.
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road.
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
5
When trouble arises
743
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is acti-
vated.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode
or turn it off.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an air-
bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of
fuel to the engine.
STEP 1
STEP 2
744
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
P. 759
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
•Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on
or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not nec-
essarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
When trouble arises
745
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
Electric power steering system warning light (warning
buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system
746
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(Flashes)
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the sys-
tem is not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 278)
• The light will turn on when the pre-collision braking is dis-
abled. (P. 279 )
• The light will turn on when the system cannot temporarily
be used. (P. 759 )
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
•The TRAC system; or
• The hill-start assist control system
Warning light Warning light/Details
5
When trouble arises
747
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light goes off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that one or more of
the doors is not fully closed.
Check that all the doors are
closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 2.8 gal. (10.7
L, 2.3 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
(On the instru-
ment panel)
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(On the center
panel)
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
P. 754
748
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not
fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
(P. 759)
*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds
intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20
km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a differ-
ent tone for 20 more seconds.
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
• Natural causes (P. 75 0 )
• Flat tire (P. 7 74 )
Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure (including the full-size
spare tire) to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after a
few minutes. In case the light
does not turn off even if the
tire inflation pressure is
adjusted, have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pres-
sure warning system
(P. 751)
Have the system checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
749
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors,
side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield and rear side airbag sensors,
door sensors, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front
passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indi-
cator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. (P. 11 9)
■Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and warning
buzzer
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound
even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops,
the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning
buzzer may sound.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
750
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case,
adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few min-
utes).
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though
the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light
will go off after a few minutes.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare
tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust to the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warn-
ing light will turn off after a few minutes.
■If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby
●If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings
5
When trouble arises
751
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
●If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used
●Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor
radio wave signal reception
●Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: If a large metallic object which can interfere
with signal reception is put in the luggage compartment
■If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have
it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■Customization
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 8 3 4)
CAUTION
■When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and
operate using more force than usual.
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change
it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
752
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell-
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
5
When trouble arises
753
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warn-
ing system may not operate properly.
754
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning message Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates the following:
• The brake fluid level is low; or,
• The brake system is malfunctioning.
A buzzer also sounds.
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and per-
form the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights comes on again after the following actions
have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
5
When trouble arises
755
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
The warning light may come on if the engine oil pres-
sure is too low.
(Flashes)
(AWD models)
Indicates the AWD system has overheated
756
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may
lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message Details
(AWD models)
Indicates a malfunction in the AWD system
Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system
Indicates a malfunction in the brake lights system
5
When trouble arises
757
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing.
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system
or the radar cruise control system (If equipped)
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate
the system.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight
leveling system
Warning message Details
758
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system;
or,
• The seat belt pretensioner system
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or,
• The brake assist system
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power
Steering) system
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor.
Warning message Details
5
When trouble arises
759
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected
problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed
The system also indi-
cates which doors are
not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the door(s) are not yet
fully closed.
Make sure that all the
doors are closed.
Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the hood is not yet fully
closed.
Close the hood.
760
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Indicates that the back
door is not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the back door is not yet
fully closed.
Close the back door.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the moon
roof is not fully closed
(with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch off,
and the driver's door
open)
Close the moon roof.
Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h),
flashes and a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is still
engaged.
Release the parking
brake.
Indicates that the washer
fluid level is low Add washer fluid.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
761
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all mainte-
nance according to the
driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*
should be performed
soon.
If necessary, perform
maintenance.
Comes on approximately
4500 miles (7200 km)
after the maintenance
data has been reset.
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all mainte-
nance is required to cor-
respond to the driven
distance on the mainte-
nance schedule*. Perform the necessary
maintenance. Please reset
the maintenance data
after the maintenance is
performed. (P. 657)
Comes on approximately
5000 miles (8000 km)
after the maintenance
data has been reset.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless the
maintenance data has
been reset.)
(Flashes)
(AWD models)
Indicates that the AWD
system is not currently
functional
A buzzer also sounds.
Reduce vehicle speed or
stop the vehicle in a safe
place until the warnings
clear.
In this case, do not stop
the engine.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
762
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(If equipped)
Indicates that the pre-
collision system is not
currently functional
because the grille or the
sensor is dirty.
This message also
appears when the pre-
collision system is not
functional due to over-
heating.
• Check the grille and the
sensor and clean them if
they are dirty.
• In case of overheating,
the system will become
functional once the sys-
tem cools down.
(If equipped)
Indicates that intuitive
parking assist is dirty or
covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
The site of the malfunc-
tion and the vehicle
image are flashing.
Clean the sensor.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the radar
cruise control sensor is
dirty or covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
763
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(If equipped)
Indicates that the radar
cruise control system is
unable to judge vehicle-
to-vehicle distance
A buzzer also sounds.
• Switch driving mode to
normal.
• If the windshield wipers
are on, turn them off or
set them to a mode other
than AUTO (If
equipped) or high speed
wiper operation.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that there is a
high possibility of a fron-
tal collision, or that the
pre-collision braking
function is operating
A buzzer also sounds.
At the same time,
will appear on
the head-up display (the
image flashes).
Slow the vehicle by apply-
ing the brakes.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that your vehi-
cle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in radar cruise
mode)
A buzzer also sounds.
At the same time,
will appear on
the head-up display (the
image flashes).
Slow the vehicle by apply-
ing the brakes.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
764
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Indicates that the engine
has overheated
A buzzer also sounds.
Stop and check.
(P. 799)
Indicates that remaining
fuel is approximately 2.8
gal. (10.7 L, 2.3 Imp. gal.)
or less
Refuel the vehicle.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned off or
turned to ACCESSORY
mode and the driver's
door is opened while the
lights are turned on.
Turn the lights off.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the Blind
Spot Monitor sensors or
the surrounding area on
the bumper is dirty or
covered with ice.
Clean the sensor and its
surrounding area on the
bumper.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
765
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner's Manual Supple-
ment” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
Indicates that the auto-
matic transmission fluid
temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds.
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place, shift the shift lever
to “P” and wait until the
light goes off.
If the light goes off, you
may start the vehicle
again. If the light does
not go off, contact your
Lexus dealer.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
766
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the malfunction repaired immediately
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message and light go off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
War nin g message Details Correction
procedure
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
The electronic key
is not detected
when an attempt
is made to start
the engine.
Confirm the loca-
tion of the elec-
tronic key.
Sounds
once
Sounds
3 times
(Flashes)
The electronic key
was carried out-
side the vehicle
and a door other
than the driver's
door was opened
and closed while
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was in a
mode other than
off.
Bring the elec-
tronic key back
into the vehicle.
The driver's door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was
in P and the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
not turned off.
Tu r n t h e
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off
or bring the elec-
tronic key back
into the vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
767
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Sounds
once
Sounds
once
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to exit the
vehicle with the
electronic key and
lock the doors
without first turn-
ing the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch off.
Tu r n t h e
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off
and lock the
doors again.
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to start the
engine without
the electronic key
being present, or
the electronic key
was not function-
ing normally.
An attempt was
made to drive
when the regular
key was not inside
the vehicle.
Confirm that the
electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
768
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Con-
tinuous
(Flashes)
The driver’s door
was opened when
the shift lever was
not in P and the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
not turned off.
Shift the shift lever
to P.
Con-
tinuous
Con-
tinuous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
The driver's door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was
not in P and the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
not turned off.
• Shift the shift
lever to P.
• Bring the elec-
tronic key back
into the vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
War nin g message Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
769
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Sounds
once
Con-
tinuous
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to lock the
doors using the
smart access sys-
tem with push-
button start while
the electronic key
was still inside the
vehicle.
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from
the vehicle and
lock the doors
again.
An attempt was
made to lock
either front door
by opening a door
and putting the
inside lock button
into the lock posi-
tion, then closing
the door by pull-
ing on the outside
door handle with
the electronic key
still inside the
vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
770
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
•When the doors
were unlocked
with the
mechanical key
and then the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was
pressed, the
electronic key
could not be
detected in the
vehicle.
• The electronic
key could not be
detected in the
vehicle even
after the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was
pressed two
consecutive
times.
Touch the elec-
tronic key to the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while depressing
the brake pedal.
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to start the
engine with the
shift lever in an
incorrect position.
Shift the shift lever
to P and start the
engine.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
War nin g message Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
771
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off
when the shift
lever was not in P.
To turn off the
engine, first shift
the shift lever to P
and then turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
Power was turned
off due to the
automatic power
off function.
Next time when
starting the
engine, increase
the engine speed
slightly and main-
tain that level for
approximately 5
minutes to
recharge the bat-
tery.
Sounds
once
The electronic key
has a low battery.
Replace the elec-
tronic key battery.
(P. 70 1)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
772
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
The driver's door
was opened and
closed with the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
turned off and
then the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
put in ACCES-
SORY mode
twice without the
engine being
started.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while depressing
the brake pedal.
During an engine
starting proce-
dure in the event
that the elec-
tronic key was not
functioning prop-
erly (P. 794 ) ,
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was
touched with the
electronic key.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
within 10 seconds
of the buzzer
sounding.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
War nin g message Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
773
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
The steering lock
could not be
released within 3
seconds of the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
being pressed.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while depressing
the brake pedal
and moving the
steering wheel left
and right.
■Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-
to-vehicle distance decreases:
●When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
●Immediately after cruise control speed is set
●At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
774
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with
the spare tire.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P.
●Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
5
When trouble arises
775
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Towing eyelet
Tool bag
Jack handle
Jack Spare tire
Wheel nut
wrench
Spare tire
cover
Towing eyelet
To ol b a g
Jack handle
Jack Spare tire
Wheel nut
wrench
Spare tire
cover
776
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Pull the lever upward to fold back
the front part of the deck board.
Pull the folded deck board upright.
Pull on the attached hook to
extend the string.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
777
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Use the hook to secure the deck
board as shown in the illustration.
Remove the jack after removing
the hook.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Pull the lever upward to fold back
the front part of the deck board.
Pull on the attached hook to
extend the string.
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
778
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Use the hook to secure the deck
board as shown in the illustration.
Remove the jack after removing
the hook.
STEP 3
STEP 4
5
When trouble arises
779
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
Lift up the deck board. (See “Taking out the jack” for details.)
Remove the spare tire cover.
Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
780
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
STEP 1
Flat tire Wheel chock
positions
Front
Left-
hand side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side tire
Right-
hand side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side tire
Rear
Left-
hand side
In front of the
front right-
hand side tire
Right-
hand side
In front of the
front left-
hand side tire
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
781
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP 4
STEP 5
782
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, causing the tire to come
off.
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand
by approximately the same amount.
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Turn the nuts until the washers
come into contact with the wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Disc wheel
seat
Tapered portion
Wheel nut
Disc wheel
Washer
5
When trouble arises
783
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each wheel nut two
or three times in the order shown
in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
STEP 3
STEP 4
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.
(P. 815)
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire
pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire
pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
STEP 5
784
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with a
compact spare tire)
Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the
following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehi-
cle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
■After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 685)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
785
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,
leading to death or serious injury.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the
jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
786
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Replacing a flat tire
●Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after
the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the
brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other
body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel
while the vehicle is moving.
●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading
to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power back door
In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door
main switch (P. 58). Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unin-
tentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands
and fingers being caught and injured.
5
When trouble arises
787
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use
with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
●Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera-
tions that cause sudden engine braking.
■When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
●ABS & Brake assist
●VSC
●Enhanced VSC (if equipped)
●TRAC
●VDIM (if equipped)
●Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
●Navigation system (if equipped)
●Cruise control (if equipped)
●Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
●Pre-Collision System (if equipped)
Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may even nega-
tively affect the drive-train components:
●AWD system (if equipped)
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
788
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the
vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road sur-
faces.
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 685)
5
When trouble arises
789
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 165), consider each of the following points.
■The engine will not start, even though the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting proce-
dures. (P. 165)
●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 1 1 0)
■The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low vol-
ume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 796 )
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■The starter motor does not turn over.
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electri-
cal problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an
interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 790)
790
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is functioning normally:
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about 15
seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 796 )
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
5
When trouble arises
791
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental
operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted:
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override but-
ton.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
792
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
793
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the side doors and key linked functions
Use the mechanical key (P. 31)
in order to perform the following
operations (driver’s door only):
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Opens the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 42) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and
the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
794
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If any of the doors is opened or
closed while the key is being
touched to the switch, an alarm will
sound to indicate that the start
function cannot detect the elec-
tronic key.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds of
the buzzer sounding, keeping the brake pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be oper-
ated, contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
795
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you nor-
mally do when stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the elec-
tronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 70 1)
■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (P. 166)
796
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps
below.
Open the hood. Remove the battery cover. (P. 673 )
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on the second vehicle
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal
on the second vehicle
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid,
stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery and any
moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
STEP 1
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
797
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■When the battery is removed or discharged
●The power back door must be initialized. (P. 847 )
●Make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing
the battery. The key may be locked in the vehicle if the alarm is activated.
(P. 114)
■Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehi-
cle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain
electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may dis-
charge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automat-
ically during driving.)
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 min-
utes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the
engine of your vehicle by turning the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order from which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
798
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery:
●Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is
not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with
each other.
●Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the bat-
tery.
■Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when han-
dling the battery:
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehi-
cle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in
the cooling fans or belt.
5
When trouble arises
799
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
Correction procedures
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning
system, and then stop the engine.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the engine has cooled down
sufficiently, inspect the hoses and
radiator core (radiator) for any
leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
The coolant level is satisfactory if it
is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
Radiator cap
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
●“ENGINE OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display.
●Steam comes out from under the hood.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
800
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Add coolant if necessary.
(P. 67 1)
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if coolant is unavailable.
Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check
that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant
leaks from the radiator or hoses.
The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immedi-
ately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking
the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air con-
ditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
STEP 5
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injuries such as burns.
●Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans
and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting
in serious injury.
●Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
STEP 6
STEP 7
5
When trouble arises
801
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
■To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
●Do not use any coolant additives.
802
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever
to P.
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the front
wheels to help provide traction.
Restart the engine.
AWD models: Activate all-wheel drive lock mode. (P. 275)
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and release the park-
ing brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the acceler-
ator pedal.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
5
When trouble arises
803
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■When it is difficult to free the vehicle
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surround-
ing area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may
also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme cau-
tion.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than
necessary.
●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehi-
cle may require towing to be freed.
Press the VSC off switch to turn off TRAC.
804
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
CAUTION
■If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the engine.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle
in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehi-
cle speed as much as possible.
To stop the engine, press and
hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for 2 consecutive
seconds or more, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in suc-
cession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 3
STEP 4
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP 5
5
When trouble arises
805
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
806
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicle specifications 6
805
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 806
Fuel information...................... 818
Tire information....................... 821
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ........ 834
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.................... 847
806
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: Vehicles without roof antenna and roof rails
*3: Vehicles with roof antenna but without roof rails
*4: Vehicles with roof rails
*5: Without towing package
*6: With towing package
Overall length 187.8 in. (4770 mm)
Overall width 74.2 in. (1885 mm)
Overall height*1
66.3 in. (1685 mm)*2
66.7 in. (1695 mm)*3
67.9 in. (1725 mm)*4
Wheelbase 107.9 in. (2740 mm)
Tr e a d Front 64.2 in. (1630 mm)
Rear 64.0 in. (1625 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 885 lb. (400 kg)
Trailer Weight Rating
(trailer weight + cargo weight)
2000 lb. (907 kg)*5
3500 lb. (1588 kg)*6
807
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle identification
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel. On some mod-
els, this number is also stamped under the front passenger seat.
This number is also on the Certifi-
cation Label.
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
808
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Fuel
Model 2GR-FE
Typ e 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.70 3.27 in. (94.0 83.0 mm)
Displacement 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research octane number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 Imp. gal.)
809
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Lubrication system
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the follow-
ing grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference*)
With filter 6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp. qt.)
Without filter 6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
810
6-1. Specifications
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced with
SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is oper-
ated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee
(ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
Outside temperature
811
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity
Without towing pack-
age 9.1 qt. (8.6 L, 7.6 Imp. qt.)
With towing package 10.0 qt. (9.5 L, 8.4 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• A similar high-quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,
and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO FK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
812
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Automatic transaxle
6-speed models
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact
your Lexus dealer.
8-speed models
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact
your Lexus dealer.
Battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and
all the lights are turned off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Fluid capacity*2WD 6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp. qt.)
AWD 7.1 qt. (6.7 L, 5.9 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
Fluid capacity*7.2 qt. (6.8 L, 6.0 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may
cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by
vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
813
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Transfer (AWD models)
*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an
equivalent oil of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications. Please
contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Rear differential (AWD models)
*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an
equivalent oil of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications. Please
contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Oil capacity 0.8 qt. (0.8 L, 0.7 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
Oil capacity 0.5 qt. (0.5 L, 0.4 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
814
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51
kgf) while the engine is running
*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.5 lbf (300 N, 31
kgf)
Steering
Pedal clearance*13.5 in. (88 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel*27 10 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
815
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tires and wheels
Type A
Type B
Tire s ize P235/60R18 102V, T165/90D18 107M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 18 7 1/2J, 18 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire s ize P235/60R18 102V
Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 18 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
816
6-1. Specifications
Typ e C
Typ e D
Tire s ize P235/55R19 101V, T165/90D18 107M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160
km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted
by law, add 1 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
front tires, 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire infla-
tion pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 19 7 1/2J, 18 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire s ize P235/55R19 101V
Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h),
in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add
1 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires, 3 psi
(20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear tires. Never
exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indi-
cated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 19 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
817
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Light bulbs
A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: D4S discharge bulbs D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear) F: H16 halogen bulbs
*:If equipped
Light bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Headlights
High beam
Low beam (halogen bulbs)*
Low beam (discharge bulbs)*
9005
60
55
35
A
B
C
Front turn signal lights
7444NA
28/8 D
Tail lights 5 E
Front fog lights (halogen bulbs)*19 F
Rear side marker lights 5 E
Rear turn signal lights 21 D
Back-up lights 921 16 E
Outer foot lights 5 E
Interior
Vanity lights 8 E
Front interior lights 5 E
Rear interior lights 8 E
Luggage compartment lights 5 E
Door courtesy lights 5 E
Footwell lights 3.8 E
818
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Lexus dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine
knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
819
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean
and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration pro-
gram.
●Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more
information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to
the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygen-
ates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
mance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
●If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
●Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
●Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E30, E50, E85 (which are only some
examples of fuel containing more than
15% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline contain-
ing more than 15% ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
820
6-1. Specifications
■Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopen-
tadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-
taining MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this hap-
pens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be dam-
aged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic convert-
ers causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated
here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot start-
ing, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
822
6-1. Specifications
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is
a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres-
sure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 68 8)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 815)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
Summer tire or all season tire (P. 68 8)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (P. 783)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emer-
gency use only.
823
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
824
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire hei ght
Wheel diameter
825
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehi-
cles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
826
6-1. Specifications
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) trac-
tion.
827
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
828
6-1. Specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres-
sure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a man-
ufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equip-
ment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants speci-
fied in the second column of Table 1* that follows
829
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (dis-
tributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
830
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
831
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Intended outboard side-
wall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipur-
pose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
832
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fab-
ric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( )
on at least one sidewall
Te s t r im The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
833
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Tr e a d That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tre a d r i b A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tre a d s e p a ra t i o n Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity,
Number of occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 22 in front
5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
834
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Customizing vehicle features
It is possible to customize certain vehicle features using the multi-infor-
mation switches. *
*: For instructions on customizing vehicle features using the navigation
system screen, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
For instructions on customizing vehicle features using the Display
Audio system screen: P. 337
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a
safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set.
Press and hold the menu switch of
the multi-information switches to
display customize mode.
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personal-
ized to suit your preferences. Programming of these preferences can be
performed by your Lexus dealer.
It is also possible to customize certain vehicle features yourself using the
multi-information switches, the navigation system screen or the Display
Audio system screen.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
STEP 1
835
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Press the “” or “” switch to
select the item to be custom-
ized.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
confirm.
Press the “” or “” switch to
select the desired setting for the
item being customized.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
confirm.
When customization is completed, press the menu switch to clear the
customization screen.
STEP 2
STEP 3
836
6-2. Customization
Customizable Features
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be changed
using the Display Audio system
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be changed
using the multi-information switches
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using
the screen of the navigation system
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using
the multi-information switches
Vehicles without a Display Audio system and navigation system: Set-
tings that can be changed using the multi-information switches
Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
837
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Door lock (P. 52, 793)
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Unlocking using a
key
Driver's
door
unlocked
in one step,
all doors
unlocked
in two
steps
All doors
unlocked
in one step
— — O— — O
Speed-detecting
automatic door lock
function
Off On O—O—O O
Shifting gears to
position other than
P locks all doors
On Off O—O—O O
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors On Off O—O—O O
Opening driver's
door unlocks all
doors
Off On O—O—O O
838
6-2. Customization
Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control
(P. 35, 49)
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Operation buzzer
volume Level 7 Off to level
6O—O—O O
Operation signal
(buzzer) On Off O—O—O O
Operation signal
(emergency flash-
ers)
On Off O—O—O O
Open door warning
buzzer On Off —————O
Time elapsed before
the automatic door
lock function is acti-
vated if a door is not
opened after being
unlocked
60 sec-
onds
Off
O—O—O O
30 sec-
onds
120 sec-
onds
Smart door unlock-
ing
Driver’s
door
All the
doors O—O—O O
Smart access sys-
tem with push-but-
ton start
On Off O—O—O O
839
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Power back door (P. 57)
Wireless remote control (P. 49 )
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Power back door
opening operation
using the back door
opener button
On Off —————O
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Unlocking opera-
tion
Driver's
door
unlocked
in one step,
all doors
unlocked
in two
steps
All doors
unlocked
in one step
O—O—O O
Panic function On Off —————O
840
6-2. Customization
Automatic light control system (P. 211)
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Time elapsed before
the headlights turn
off
30 sec-
onds
Off
O—O—O O
60 sec-
onds
90 sec-
onds
Light sensor sensi-
tivity Standard -2 to 2 O—O—O O
Light reminder
buzzer On Off ———— —O
Daytime running
light system (except
for Canada)
On Off O—O—O O
841
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Illumination(P. 595)
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Time elapsed before
the interior lights
turn off
15 seconds
7.5 sec-
onds O—O—O O
30 sec-
onds
Time elapsed before
the exterior lights
turn off
15 seconds
7.5 sec-
onds O—O—O O
30 sec-
onds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked On Off —————O
Operation after the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
turned off
On Off —————O
Operation when
you approach the
vehicle with the
electronic key on
your person
On Off —————O
Wireless remote
control linked exte-
rior lights when the
surrounding area is
dark
On Off —————O
842
6-2. Customization
Seat belt reminder (P. 747 )
Automatic air conditioning system (P. 345, 353)
Interior light control On Off O—O—O O
Exterior light control On Off O—O—O O
Shift lever lights On Off —————O
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer
On Off —————O
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
A/C auto switch
operation Auto Manual O—O— — O
Exhaust gas sensor
sensitivity Standard -3 to 3 O—O— — O
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
843
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Driving position memory (P. 76 )
Meter (P. 15 6 )
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Driver’s seat move-
ment when exiting
the vehicle (on some
models)
Full
Off
O—O—O O
Partial
Selecting whether
the driver’s door or
all doors are linked
to the power easy
access system
Driver’s
door
All the
doors —————O
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Eco Driving Indica-
tor Light On Off —O—OOO
844
6-2. Customization
Power windows (P. 98)
Moon roof (P. 10 1)
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Mechanical key
linked operation On Off —————O
Wireless remote
control linked open-
ing
On Off —————O
Wireless remote
control linked open-
ing buzzer
On Off —————O
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Mechanical key
linked operation On Off —————O
Wireless remote
control linked open-
ing
On Off —————O
Linked operation of
components when
door key is used
Slide only Tilt only —————O
Linked operation of
components when
wireless remote
control is used
Slide only Tilt only —————O
845
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Turn signal lever (P. 187)
Intuitive parking assist (P. 245)
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Times of flashing of
the lane change sig-
nal flashers
3
5
— — O— — O
7
9
11
Off
Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Buzzer volume 31 to 5 O—O— — O
Detection distance
of the front center
sensors
Far Near O—O— — O
Detection distance
of the rear center
sensors
Far Near O—O— — O
Display setting
(when intuitive park-
ing assist is operat-
ing)
All sensors
displayed
No sensors
displayed O—O— — O
846
6-2. Customization
Multi-information display (P. 200)
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information switches
Available languages English, French and Spanish
Available units miles (MPG), km (km/L), km (L/100 km)
■In the following situations, customize mode will automatically be turned off.
●A warning message appears after the customize mode screen is displayed.
●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off.
●The vehicle begins to move while the customize mode screen is displayed.
CAUTION
■Cautions during customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing
features.
847
6
Vehicle specifications
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Power back door
• After reconnecting or changing the
battery
• After changing a fuse
P. 56
Maintenance data
(U.S.A. only) After the maintenance is performed P. 657
Tire pressure warning
system
• When rotating the tires
• When changing tire pressure (such
as when changing traveling speed,
load weight, etc.)
• When changing the tire size
P. 685
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases
such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on
the vehicle.
848
6-3. Initialization
For owners 7
849
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners..................... 850
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).............................. 851
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)............................. 853
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)............................. 863
850
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-
free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
851
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
●Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
●Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
●Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
●Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
852
Entretien et soin
■Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.
853
7
For owners
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions
in English.
Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur/le coussin gonflable du
passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de
l’habitacle
Coussins gonflables SRS de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant
854
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideaux
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des passagers avant
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des passagers dans les sièges
arrière extérieurs
Coussins gonflables SRS rideaux
●Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis aux places extérieures
●Peuvent contribuer à empêcher les occupants d'être éjectés du
véhicule en cas de tonneau
855
7
For owners
Composition du système de coussin gonflable SRS
Coussins gonflables de genoux
Coussin gonflable du passager
avant
Coussins gonflables rideaux
Coussins gonflables latéraux
avant
Système de classification de
l’occupant du siège passager
avant (ECU et capteurs)
Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG
ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Coussins gonflables latéraux
arrière
Témoin d’avertissement SRS
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Capteurs de coussins
gonflables rideaux et arrière
Commutateur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
conducteur
Capteur de position du siège
conducteur
Capteur de coussin gonflable
Capteurs de coussin gonflable
frontal
Commutateur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité du
passager avant
Capteurs de porte
Prétensionneurs de ceintures
de sécurité et limiteurs de
force
856
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines
applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier
électronique (ECU) des coussins gonflables régule le déploiement de
ces derniers sur la base des informations qu’il reçoit des capteurs, etc.,
indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système.
Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l’occupation du
véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des coussins
gonflables est obtenu au moyen d’une réaction chimique dans les
dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant
d’amortir le mouvement des occupants.
857
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes avec les coussins gonflables SRS.
Autrement, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
●
Le conducteur et les passagers du véhicule doivent porter correctement leur
ceinture de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à utiliser avec
les ceintures de sécurité.
●
Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence considérable,
qui peut être très dangereuse, voire mortelle, si le conducteur se trouve très près
du coussin gonflable . L’autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux
États-Unis, la “NHTSA” (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration)
conseille:
La zone à risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 à
3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, placez-vous à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre
coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante.
Cette distance est à mesurer entre l’axe du volant et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis
à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de
plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore atteindre
confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la plupart
des conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même
avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un
peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir
incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous
rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège,
remontez-le.
• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d’orienter
le coussins gonflables en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête
et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en conservant le
contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.
858
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
●Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une
violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse, voire mortelle, si le
passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Éloignez le siège
passager avant au maximum du coussin gonflable et réglez le dossier de siège de
façon à être assis bien droit dans le siège.
●Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés
peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d’un coussin
gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour
pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Lexus recommande vivement d’installer
tous les nourrissons et enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule et de prévoir
pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour
les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant.
●N’installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège du
passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas
d’accident, la force de déploiement rapide du coussins gonflables du passager
avant peut grièvement, voire mortellement blesser l’enfant si le siège de sécurité
enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège du passager avant.
●Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture
de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de
sécurité avant, mais pas au pêne de la
ceinture de sécurité, les coussins
gonflables SRS frontaux détectent que le
conducteur et le passager avant ont
attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, alors
même que ce n’est pas le cas. Dans ce cas,
il se peut que les coussins gonflables SRS
frontaux ne se déploient pas correctement
en cas d’accident et vous risquez d’être tué
ou grièvement blessé. Veillez à porter la
ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité.
859
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
●
Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et
ne vous appuyez pas contre le tableau de
bord.
●
Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le coussin gonflable SRS passager
avant ou bien s’asseoir sur les genoux du
passager avant.
●
Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges
avant voyager avec un objet sur les
genoux.
●
Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
●
Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller sur les
sièges passagers en appui contre la porte
ou sortir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du
véhicule.
860
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
●Si un cache en vinyle est mis dans la zone où les coussins gonflables SRS de
genoux se déploie, assurez-vous de l’enlever.
●N’utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement
des coussins gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d’en gêner le déploiement.
De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de
fonctionner correctement, désactiver le dispositif ou entraîner le déploiement
accidentel des coussins gonflables latéraux, ce qui pourrait entraîner la mort ou
des blessures graves.
●Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones renfermant
les composants des coussins gonflables SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des coussins
gonflables SRS.
●Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le déploiement
(gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds.
●Ne rien fixer ou appuyer contre les zones
telles que le tableau de bord, le volant ou
des zones inférieures du tableau de bord.
Ces éléments pourraient devenir des
projectiles dans le cas du déploiement des
coussins gonflables du conducteur SRS,
passager avant et genoux.
●Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la vitre du pare-
brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants
avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la
poignée d’assistance.
●Ne suspendez aucun cintre nu ni objet dur
aux crochets à vêtements. En cas de
déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS
rideaux, tous ces objets pourraient se
transformer en projectiles et causer des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
861
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
●
Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air frais, ou
bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout
résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations de la peau.
●
Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture du
moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent
abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
●
Ne placez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple.
Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du
siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager.
En conséquence, le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant risque de ne pas se
déployer en cas de choc.
862
ATTENTION
■Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de coussin gonflable SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Lexus si vous avez besoin
d’intervenir sur votre véhicule, de vous en séparer ou de procéder à l’une des
modifications suivantes.
Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se
déployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures.
●Installation, dépose, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
●Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau
de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garniture, des montants
avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
●Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des flancs
de l’habitacle
●Installation d’un protège-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de
chasse-neiges ou de treuils
●Modifications des suspensions du véhicule
●Installation d’appareils électroniques tels que radio émetteur/récepteur ou
lecteurs CD
●Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne
atteinte d’un handicap physique
863
7
For owners
Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of headlight aim instructions from the
headlight aim section in this manual.
■Dépose des habillages du compartiment moteur
Extérieur
Avant
864
■Vis de réglage dans l'axe vertical
Véhicules équipés de projecteurs à halogène
Vis de réglage A
Vis de réglage B
Véhicules équipés de projecteurs à décharge
Vis de réglage A
Vis de réglage B
■Avant de vérifier le réglage du faisceau des phares
Vérifiez que le réservoir de carburant du véhicule est plein et
que la carrosserie autour des projecteurs n'a pas subi de choc
suffisant pour la déformer.
Stationnez le véhicule bien à plat.
Installez-vous dans le siège conducteur.
Donnez plusieurs impulsions à la carrosserie du véhicule de
manière à comprimer/détendre les suspensions.
ÉTAPE 1
2
ÉTAPE
3
ÉTAPE
4
ÉTAPE
865
7
For owners
■Réglage du faisceau des phares
Véhicules équipés de projecteurs à halogène
Tournez la vis A dans l'un ou
l'autre sens au moyen d'un
tournevis cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Mémorisez le sens dans lequel
vous avez tourné et le nombre
de tours.
Tournez la vis B du même
nombre de tours et dans le
même sens qu'à l'étape 1, avec
un tournevis cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Si vous n'arrivez pas à régler le
projecteur en procédant de la
sorte, confiez votre véhicule à
votre concessionnaire Lexus
pour qu'il règle le faisceau des
phares.
ÉTAPE
1
2
ÉTAPE
866
Véhicules équipés de projecteurs à décharge
Tournez la vis A dans l'un ou
l'autre sens au moyen d'un
tournevis cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Mémorisez le sens dans lequel
vous avez tourné et le nombre
de tours.
Tournez la vis B du même
nombre de tours dans le même
sens qu'en étape 1 au moyen
d'un tournevis cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Si vous n'arrivez pas à régler le
projecteur en procédant de la
sorte, confiez votre véhicule à
votre concessionnaire Lexus
pour qu'il règle le faisceau des
phares.
ÉTAPE 1
2
ÉTAPE
Index
867
Abbreviation list .................... 868
Alphabetical index................. 870
What to do if... ....................... 882
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Naviga-
tion System Owner's Manual” for information regarding
the equipment listed below.
• Navigation system
• Air conditioning controls
• Windshield wiper de-icer
• Rear view monitor system
• Intuitive parking assist
• Audio/video system
• Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogging
868
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
2WD 2 Wheel Drive
4WD 4 Wheel Drive
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift control
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
AWD All Wheel Drive
BSM Blind Spot Monitor
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECO Economy/Ecology
ECT Electronic Controlled Transmission
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS Electric Power Steering
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M Emission Inspection and Maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M + S Mud and Snow
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
869
Abbreviation list
OBD On Board Diagnostics
PCS Pre-Collision System
PWR Power
RF Radio Frequency
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC Traction Control
TWR Trailer Weight Rating
VDIM Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
870
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C*
Air conditioning filter .......................699
Automatic air conditioning
system*....................................345, 353
ABS.............................................................269
ACCESSORY mode .......................... 165
Active torque control
AWD mode .........................................269
Air conditioning system*
Air conditioning filter .......................699
Automatic air conditioning
system*....................................345, 353
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions..........122
Airbag precautions for your
child......................................................... 127
Airbag warning light ........................745
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions.............................................123
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ......................................... 127
Front passenger occupant
classification system........................132
General airbag precautions .......... 127
Locations of airbags............................ 119
Modification and disposal of
airbags.....................................................131
Proper driving posture .............117, 127
Side airbag operating
conditions.............................................123
Side airbag precautions ................... 127
SRS airbags ............................................. 119
Alarm............................................................ 112
All-wheel drive lock switch .............. 275
Antenna........................................380, 489
Anti-lock brake system...................... 269
Armrest .................................................... 622
Assist grips .............................................. 624
Audio input* ................................. 412, 554
Audio system*
Antenna..................................................489
Audio input........................................... 554
AUX port.............................................. 554
Bluetooth® audio system .............530
CD player/changer..........................492
Hands-free system for mobile
phone...................................................560
iPod............................................................510
MP3/WMA disc.................................501
Optimal use ......................................... 552
Portable audio device..................... 554
Radio ....................................................... 483
Steering wheel audio switch........556
USB memory...................................... 520
USB port .................................... 510, 520
A
871
Alphabetical index
Audio system
(Lexus Display Audio system)
Antenna..................................................380
Audio input............................................. 412
AUX port................................................ 412
Bluetooth® audio system ............... 414
CD player .............................................383
Hands-free system for mobile
phone................................................... 433
iPod .......................................................... 394
MP3/WMA disc...............................384
Optimal use..........................................428
Portable audio device....................... 412
Radio ......................................................368
Steering wheel audio switch........430
USB memory ...................................... 402
USB port....................................394, 402
Automatic air conditioning system*
Air conditioning filter.......................699
Automatic air conditioning
system* ...................................345, 353
Automatic headlight leveling
system...................................................... 214
Automatic light control system ..........211
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission............171, 178
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P..................................... 791
M mode....................................................183
S mode ..................................................... 174
AUX port ...................................... 412, 554
Auxiliary boxes ..........................606, 627
Back door
Back door.................................................56
Wireless remote control...................49
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Wattage................................................... 817
Battery
Checking ................................................681
If the vehicle has a discharged
battery ..................................................796
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................302
Blind Spot Monitor...............................286
Bluetooth® audio*.....................414, 530
Bluetooth® phone* .................433, 560
Bottle holders........................................ 600
Brake
Fluid............................................................ 814
Parking brake .......................................189
Brake assist..............................................269
Break-in tips.............................................155
BSM............................................................286
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
B
872
Alphabetical index
Card key......................................................30
Care
Exterior .................................................. 650
Interior.....................................................653
Seat belts................................................654
Cargo capacity.......................................301
Cargo hooks........................................... 627
CD changer
CD ................................................383, 492
MP3 ..............................................384, 501
WMA disc..................................384, 501
CD player .................................... 383, 492
Chains .......................................................302
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition...................137
Booster seats, installation..................141
Convertible seats, definition ..........137
Convertible seats, installation..........141
Front passenger occupant
classification system........................132
Infant seats, definition.........................137
Infant seats, installation........................141
Installing CRS with LATCH
system....................................................142
Installing CRS with seat belts.........144
Installing CRS with top tether
straps..................................................... 148
Child safety
Airbag precautions............................. 127
Back door precautions...................... 62
Battery
precautions ...........................682, 796
Child restraint system........................137
Child-protectors................................... 53
How your child should wear
the seat belt..........................................85
Installing child restraints.....................141
Moon roof precautions....................104
Power window lock switch............. 98
Power window precautions...........100
Removed electronic key battery
precautions........................................702
Seat belt extender precautions..... 89
Seat belt precautions.......................... 86
Seat heater precautions................... 621
Child-protectors......................................53
Cleaning
Exterior...................................................650
Interior..................................................... 653
Seat belts ............................................... 654
Clock*.......................................................... 611
Coat hooks.............................................. 623
Coin holder.............................................606
Compass..................................................638
Condenser..............................................678
Console box ...........................................604
Coolant
Engine coolant.....................................677
Cooling system
Engine overheating.......................... 799
Cornering assist sensors................... 245
Cruise control
Cruise control...................................... 227
Dynamic radar cruise control......232
Cup holders............................................. 601
Curtain shield airbags ...........................119
Customizable features.......................834
C
873
Alphabetical index
Daytime running light system............213
Defogger*
Rear window..........................................361
Side mirrors............................................361
Dimensions.............................................806
Dinghy towing ....................................... 323
Display
Multi-information display...............200
Trip information.................................. 203
Warning message ............................ 754
Do-it-yourself maintenance..............664
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights ........................595
Wattage ...................................................817
Door lock
Back door ................................................ 56
Side door...................................................52
Wireless remote control....................49
Door pockets.........................................600
Doors
Back door ................................................ 56
Door lock ................................35, 49, 52
Door windows.......................................98
Power back door ................................. 56
Side door...................................................52
Side mirrors............................................. 95
Driver's seat belt reminder light .....747
Driving
Break-in tips...........................................155
Correct posture.....................................117
Procedures.............................................154
Utility vehicle
precautions ........................................292
Winter driving tips ............................ 302
Driving position memory ......................76
Electric power steering......................269
Electronic features control.............. 200
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................793
Emergency flashers
Switch.......................................................734
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds...........744
If a warning light turns on...............744
If a warning message is
displayed.............................................754
If the back door opener is
inoperative..............................................61
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................793
If the engine will not start............... 789
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................................791
If the vehicle has a discharged
battery ..................................................796
If you have a flat tire ......................... 774
If you lose your keys.........................792
If you think something is
wrong................................................... 742
If your vehicle becomes stuck.... 802
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency.........804
If your vehicle needs to be
towed....................................................735
If your vehicle overheats ................799
D
E
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
874
Alphabetical index
Engine
Accessory mode ................................ 165
Compartment .....................................670
Engine switch........................................ 165
Hood........................................................667
How to start the engine................... 165
Identification number.......................807
If the engine will not start...............789
Ignition switch....................................... 165
Overheating.........................................799
Engine compartment cover ...............671
Engine coolant
Capacity.................................................... 811
Checking............................................... 677
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................302
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.........................................................191
Engine immobilizer system..................110
Engine oil
Capacity................................................ 809
Checking............................................... 674
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................302
EPS .............................................................269
Event data recorder ...............................26
Floor mat..................................................625
Fluid
Brake.........................................................814
Washer...................................................683
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Switch........................................................ 215
Wattage...................................................817
Footwell light ..........................................595
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Switch........................................................ 215
Wattage...................................................817
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........................132
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light ......................................747
Front seats
Adjustment .............................................. 68
Driving position memory ..................76
Flattening seatbacks ............................69
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Wattage...................................................817
F
875
Alphabetical index
Fuel
Capacity................................................ 808
Fuel gauge................................................191
Fuel pump shut off system .............743
Information............................................. 818
Refueling................................................. 105
Type........................................................... 818
Fuel door....................................................105
Fuel filler door..........................................105
Fuel pump shut off system .................743
Fuses.......................................................... 703
Garage door opener...........................632
Gauges........................................................ 191
Glove box ............................................... 599
Hands-free system for
mobile phone* ........................433, 560
Hazard lights
Switch ......................................................734
Head restraints
Adjustment ...............................................81
Headlight aim .......................................... 717
Headlight cleaner .................................226
Headlights
Discharge headlight
precautions ........................................732
Replacing light bulbs ......................... 719
Switch..........................................................211
Wattage ...................................................817
Head-up display
Display contrast adjustment
switch...................................................206
Display position adjustment
switch...................................................206
Head-up display main switch..... 206
Heaters
Seat heaters ......................................... 620
Side mirrors*......................................... 361
Steering wheel...................................... 619
Hill-start assist control ........................ 276
Hood.......................................................... 667
Hooks
Cargo ......................................................627
Coat..........................................................623
Horn ............................................................190
HUD
Display contrast adjustment
switch................................................... 206
Display position adjustment
switch................................................... 206
Head-up display main switch..... 206
I/M test......................................................663
Identification
Engine..................................................... 807
Vehicle ................................................... 807
Ignition switch.......................................... 165
Illuminated entry system....................595
Immobilizer system.................................110
Indicator lights......................................... 194
Initialization
Items to initialize .................................847
Inside rear view mirror ..........................92
Instrument panel light control
buttons .................................................... 192
G
H
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
I
876
Alphabetical index
Interior lights
Interior lights.........................................595
Switch ......................................................596
Wattage....................................................817
iPod* ............................................... 394, 510
Jack
Positioning a floor jack................... 668
Vehicle-equipped jack....................774
Jack handle.............................................. 774
Keyless entry..............................................49
Keys
Electronic key.........................................30
Engine switch........................................ 165
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................793
If you lose your keys......................... 792
Key number.............................................30
Keyless entry........................................... 49
Keys.............................................................30
Mechanical key........................................31
Wireless remote control key.......... 49
Lexus Display Audio controller......328
Lexus Display Audio system ............328
Lexus Enform with
Safety Connect*
Light bulbs
Replacing.................................................719
Wattage....................................................817
Lights
Door courtesy lights........................595
Emergency flasher switch..............734
Fog light switch .................................... 215
Hazard light switch ...........................734
Headlight switch....................................211
Interior light switch ...........................596
Luggage compartment light .......... 59
Outer foot lights.................................595
Overhead courtesy light ...............595
Personal light switch........................596
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Scuff lights.............................................595
Shift lever light.....................................595
Turn signal lever...................................187
Vanity lights............................................610
Wattage...................................................817
Load capacity.......................................... 301
Lock steering column .......................... 168
Luggage compartment lights
Switch......................................................... 59
Wattage...................................................817
Luggage cover ...................................... 629
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 664
General maintenance.....................659
Maintenance data .............................806
Maintenance requirements..........656
Meter
Instrument panel light control....... 192
Meters.........................................................191
J
K
L
M
877
Alphabetical index
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......................92
Side mirror heaters* ..........................361
Side mirrors............................................. 95
Vanity mirrors .......................................610
Mobile Assistant*................................. 343
Moon roof .................................................. 101
MP3 disc* .....................................384, 501
Multi-display light control...................615
Multi-information display
Switches .................................................200
Trip information.................................. 203
Noise from under vehicle.....................23
Odometer.................................................. 191
Oil
Engine oil............................................... 674
Opener
Back door ................................................ 56
Fuel filler door ...................................... 105
Hood ....................................................... 667
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights.................................595
Wattage ...................................................817
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding......................... 95
Mirror position memory ....................76
Outside temperature display*..........613
Overhead console .............................. 606
Overhead courtesy lights
Overhead courtesy lights .............595
Wattage ...................................................817
Overheating, Engine...........................799
Paddle shift switches ....................171, 178
Parking assist sensors*.......................245
Parking brake..........................................189
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Switch.......................................................... 211
PCS
Function ..................................................278
Pre-collision braking off
switch....................................................279
Warning light .......................................745
Personal lights
Switch...................................................... 596
Phone* ..........................................433, 565
Power back door .....................................56
Power easy access system ..................78
Power outlet............................................. 616
Power windows ........................................98
Pre-collision system
Function ..................................................278
Pre-collision braking off
switch....................................................279
Warning light .......................................745
Radar cruise control............................232
Radiator ....................................................678
Radio*............................................368, 483
Rear seat entertainment system*
Rear seats
Folding down.......................................... 72
Seat adjustment ..................................... 72
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Wattage................................................... 817
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
N
O
P
R
878
Alphabetical index
Rear view mirror
Compass ...............................................638
Inside rear view mirror....................... 92
Outside rear view mirrors ...............95
Rear view monitor
system* ...................................... 255, 264
Rear window defogger* ..................... 361
Rear window wiper..............................224
Remote Touch*
Replacing
Electronic key battery........................701
Fuses ........................................................703
Light bulbs...............................................719
Tires...........................................................774
Wireless remote control
battery....................................................701
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners......................................... 850
Reset the maintenance data.............657
Roof luggage carrier...........................296
Safety Connect*....................................642
Scuff lights................................................595
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt........................84
Automatic locking retractor............85
Child restraint system
installation ..............................................141
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts.....................................654
Emergency locking retractor ........85
How to wear your seat belt.............83
How your child should wear
the seat belt..........................................85
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use .........................87
Reminder light......................................747
Seat belt extender................................ 86
Seat belt pretensioners ..................... 84
Seat heaters............................................620
Seat position memory.............................76
Seat ventilators......................................620
Seating capacity..................................... 301
Seats
Adjustment .....................................68, 72
Adjustment
precautions.................................... 71, 74
Child seats/child restraint
system installation..............................141
Cleaning................................................653
Flatting seat backs ................................69
Head restraint.......................................... 81
Power easy access system ..............78
Properly sitting in the seat................. 117
Seat heaters .........................................620
Seat position memory.........................76
Seat ventilators ...................................620
Service reminder indicators .............194
Shift lever
Automatic transmission ...........171, 178
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P..................................... 791
Shift lever light .......................................595
Shift lock system......................................791
Side airbags ...............................................119
Side marker lights
Switch.......................................................... 211
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding......................... 95
Mirror position memory....................76
S
879
Alphabetical index
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function ......................................... 35
Starting the engine..............................165
“SOS” button ..........................................642
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ................................ 815
Storage location..................................774
Spark plug.................................................. 811
Specifications.........................................806
Speedometer............................................ 191
Steering
Column lock release .........................168
Steering wheel
Adjustment ..............................................90
Audio switches*.................... 430, 556
Heated steering wheel .....................619
Power easy access system.............. 78
Steering wheel position
memory ..................................................76
Storage feature..................................... 598
Stuck vehicle
If your vehicle becomes stuck ....802
Sun visors................................................. 609
Sunshades.................................................102
Switch
Display contrast adjustment
switch...................................................206
Display position adjustment
switch...................................................206
ECT SNOW switch............... 173, 180
Emergency flasher switch..............734
Engine switch ........................................165
ENTER switch.....................................200
Fog light switch.....................................215
Hazard light switch ...........................734
Head-up display main switch..... 206
Heated steering wheel switch......619
Ignition switch.......................................165
Light switches ......................................... 211
Menu switch ........................................ 200
Paddle shift switches .................171, 178
Power back door switch...................56
Power door lock switch ....................52
Power window switch........................98
Pre-collision braking off
switch....................................................279
Rear window wiper and
washer switch...................................224
Window lock switch............................98
Wiper and washer switch................217
Tachometer................................................191
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Switch.......................................................... 211
Wattage................................................... 817
Talk switch* ................................. 433, 566
Telephone*.................................. 433, 565
Telephone switch*.................... 433, 566
Theft deterrent system
Alarm........................................................... 112
Immobilizer system..............................110
Theft prevention labels..........................116
Tire inflation pressure .........................693
Tire information
Glossary................................................ 828
Size............................................................824
Tire identification number..............823
Uniform tire quality grading ........ 825
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
T
880
Alphabetical index
Tires
Chains.....................................................302
Checking...............................................684
If you have a flat tire...........................774
Inflation pressure................................693
Inflation pressure sensor............... 685
Information..............................................821
Replacing................................................774
Rotating tires........................................684
Size ............................................................ 815
Snow tires..............................................302
Spare tire.................................................774
Tire pressure warning
system......................................684, 747
Tools........................................................... 774
Total load capacity ................................301
Towing
Dinghy towing..................................... 323
Emergency towing ...........................735
Trailer towing.......................................306
TRAC.........................................................269
Traction control.....................................269
Trailer towing..........................................306
Trip information display..................... 200
Trip meter ...................................................191
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Switch ........................................................187
Wattage....................................................817
Under tray ...............................................608
USB port*.............. 394, 402, 510, 520
Vanity lights
Vanity lights............................................610
Wattage...................................................817
Vanity mirrors......................................... 610
VDIM......................................................... 269
Vehicle data recordings....................... 24
Vehicle dynamics integrated
management ....................................... 269
Vehicle identification number.........807
Vehicle stability control ..................... 269
Voice command switch*........433, 566
Voice command system*....................451
VSC ........................................................... 269
Warning buzzers
Brake system........................................744
Open door ...........................................747
Seat belt reminder .............................747
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ...................745
Brake assist system ...........................745
Brake system........................................744
Charging system................................744
Electric power steering...................745
Electronic engine control
system...................................................745
Low fuel level........................................747
Low tire pressure...............................747
Malfunction indicator lamp ...........745
Master warning light.........................747
U
V
W
881
Alphabetical index
Open door ............................................747
Pre-collision system......................... 745
Pretensioners ...................................... 745
Seat belt reminder light...................747
Slip indicator ........................................ 745
SRS airbags.......................................... 745
Tire pressure.........................................747
Warning messages
Anti-lock brake system .................. 756
Automatic transmission fluid ....... 759
AWD system...............755, 756, 759
Brake lamp system........................... 756
Brake system....................................... 754
Dynamic radar cruise
control system.....................756, 759
Electric power steering.................. 756
Engine oil maintenance.................. 759
Engine oil pressure........................... 755
Engine overheat................................. 759
Headlight leveling ............................. 756
Hood ....................................................... 759
Intuitive parking assist .........756, 759
Low fuel.................................................. 759
Moon roof............................................. 759
Open door ........................................... 759
Parking brake...................................... 759
Pre-collision system.............756, 759
Smart access system with
push-button start............................ 766
SRS airbags.......................................... 756
Steering lock........................................ 756
Washer fluid......................................... 759
Washer
Checking .............................................. 683
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................302
Switch.........................................................217
Washing and waxing...........................650
Weight
Cargo capacity.................................... 301
Load limits ..............................................301
Weight....................................................806
Wheels...................................................... 697
Window glasses ......................................98
Window lock switch ...............................98
Windows
Power windows.....................................98
Rear window defogger* ................. 361
Washer .....................................................217
Windshield wiper de-icer* ...............363
Windshield wipers..................................217
Wireless remote control.......................49
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery........................ 701
WMA disc* .................................. 384, 501
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
882
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 7 74 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 789 If the engine will not start
P. 11 0 Engine immobilizer system
P. 796
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 79 1
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 79 9 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 79 2 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 796
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 52 Side doors
P. 56 Back door
The horn begins to sound
P. 11 2 Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 8 0 2 If the vehicle becomes stuck
883
What to do if...
A warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 74 4 If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...
■Warning lights
or or
P. 744 P. 745
P. 747
or
P. 745 P. 747
P. 747 P. 747
P. 745 P. 745
P. 747 P. 745
P. 744 P. 747
Slip indicator
P. 745
*: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
Brake system warning light
Malfunction indicator lamp
ABS warning light
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Low fuel level warning light
Master warning light
SRS warning light
Electric power steering system
warning light
Open door warning light
Pre-collision system
warning light*
Charging system warning
light
Tire pressure warning light
884
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 667
Back door opener
P. 5 6
Fuel filler door
P. 1 0 5
Hood lock release lever
P. 667
Fuel filler door opener
P. 105
Tire inflation pressure
P. 8 1 5
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 808
Cold tire inflation
pressure P. 8 15
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
With filter 6.4 (6,1, 5,4)
Without filter 6.0 (5,7, 5.0)
Engine oil type “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
P. 80 9
